JP2021016739A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suppress a decrease in interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine determines whether or not to execute a suggestion performance suggesting the degree of expectation that a variation display of a target is controlled to an advantageous state, on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined condition. The suggestion performance of causing predetermined light emitting means to emit light is executed from the variation display executed before the variation display of the target to the variation display of the target. In the variation display of the target in which it is determined that the suggestion performance is not executed, a process of causing the predetermined light emitting means to turn off is executed regardless of whether or not the predetermined light emitting means emits light in the variation display executed before the variation display of the target. In the variation display of the target in which it is determined that the suggestion performance is executed, a process of causing the predetermined light emitting means to emit light is executed regardless of whether or not the predetermined light emitting means emits light in the variation display executed before the variation display of the target.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-17

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game medium wins a prize in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area and a starting condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of identification are identified. Information is variably displayed on a variable display device (hereinafter, also referred to as "variable" or "variable display"), and whether or not to give a predetermined game value is determined based on the display result. There is a game machine that has improved. In such a game machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, the player is in an advantageous state (big hit game state). For example, a gaming machine that is in a big hit game state opens a special electric accessory called a big winning opening or an attacker, and continuously provides a player with a state in which winning a game ball is extremely easy for a certain period of time. To do. In such a game machine, various kinds of effects are executed to notify the player of the expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed.

As such a game machine, for example, after turning on the lamp as a look-ahead notice, there is a process of turning on the lamp even in the variable display targeted for the look-ahead (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-180457

However, in the game machine in Patent Document 1, there may be a problem that the lamp that should be turned off is emitting light, which may give the player an unintended sense of expectation and reduce the interest in the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in the interest in gaming.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
An effect of executing the process of step 085AKS005 (for example, an effect of executing the process of step 085AKS005) for determining whether or not to execute a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the variable display of the target is controlled to the advantageous state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. (Control CPU 120, etc.) and
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the suggestion effect executing means (for example,) for executing the suggestion effect of causing the predetermined light emitting means to emit light from the variable display executed before the variable display of the target to the variable display of the target. CPU 120 for effect control that executes lamp effect) and
A light emitting mode determining means for determining a light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 085AKS008) is provided.
The predetermined light emitting means has a different light emitting color depending on the light emitting mode determined by the light emitting mode determining means (for example, the predetermined light emitting means emits light with the light emitting color determined in step 085AKS008).
The suggestion effect execution means
In the variable display of an object for which the determination means has determined not to execute the suggestion effect, regardless of whether or not the predetermined light emitting means emits light in the variable display executed before the variable display of the object. A process of turning off the predetermined light emitting means is performed (for example, the process of step 085AKS021 is executed).
In the variable display of the target determined by the determination means to execute the suggestion effect, the predetermined light emitting means is emitting light in the variable display executed before the variable display of the target, regardless of whether or not the predetermined light emitting means emits light. A process of causing the light emitting means to emit light is performed (for example, the process of step 085AKS021 is executed).
further,
An advantageous suggestion effect executing means capable of executing an advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a hold display advance notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye advance notice effect, etc.) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state.
It is provided with a preparatory effect executing means capable of executing a preparatory effect (for example, a hold display advance notice preparatory effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the advantageous suggestion effect is executed before the advantageous suggestion effect is executed.
The advantageous suggestion effect includes a first advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a hold display advance notice effect), a second advantageous suggestion effect different from the first advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a timer effect), and the first advantageous suggestion effect. Including a third advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a chance eye notice effect) different from the second advantageous suggestion effect.
The preparatory effect includes a first preparatory effect (for example, a hold display advance notice preparatory effect) that announces that the first advantageous suggestion effect will be executed, and a second that announces that the second advantageous suggestion effect will be executed. Including preparatory effects (for example, timer preparatory effects)
The third advantageous suggestion effect, the first preparatory effect, and the second preparatory effect can be executed in parallel in the same period (see FIGS. 12-11 (A1) and (A2)).
It is more advantageous when neither the first preparatory effect nor the second preparatory effect is executed than when either the first preparatory effect or the second preparatory effect is executed. Suggestion effects are easy to perform (see, for example, Figure 12-10).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble of turning on and off and suppress the deterioration of the game interest. In addition, it is possible to prevent a problem that the light emitting color does not emit light according to the effect and suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. In addition, the interest can be maintained favorably.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A light emitting mode determining means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 085AKS008) for determining a light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting means is further provided.
The plurality of predetermined light emitting means emit light in a different order depending on the light emitting mode determined by the light emitting mode determining means (for example, light is emitted in the lighting order determined in step 085AKS008).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a plurality of predetermined light emitting means from not emitting or extinguishing only a specific light emitting means, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
A light emitting mode determining means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 085AKS008) for determining a light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting means is further provided.
The plurality of predetermined light emitting means have different light emitting colors depending on the light emitting mode determined by the light emitting mode determining means (for example, the light emitting color determined in step 085AKS008).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that the light emitting color is not emitted according to the effect and suppress a decrease in the game interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
An effect image is displayed when the predetermined light emitting means is made to emit light, and the light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting means differs depending on the effect image (for example, a predetermined image having the same color as the light emission color of the predetermined lamp is matched with the light emission of the predetermined lamp. Display etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
When the suggestion effect is not executed, a process of turning off the predetermined light emitting means is performed (for example, the process of step 085AKS021 is executed) regardless of whether or not the predetermined light emitting means is emitting light.
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a useless sense of expectation by emitting light from the predetermined light emitting means that should be originally turned off.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
When a part of the predetermined light emitting means among the plurality of predetermined light emitting means is made to emit light, the predetermined light emitting means to be made to emit light is subjected to a process of causing light to be emitted regardless of whether or not the predetermined light emitting means is emitted to be turned off. The predetermined light emitting means of the above is subjected to a process of turning off the light regardless of whether or not the light is turned off (for example, in step 085AKS021, the predetermined lamp to be turned on is turned on and the predetermined lamp to be turned off is turned off).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the predetermined light emitting means can be emitted and turned off in a light emitting mode according to the effect.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
One of a plurality of stages of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a value from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player to 6 which is the most advantageous setting value for the player). Setting means that can be set to the set value of (for example, CPU 103 that executes the set value change process) and
It is provided with a setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 063AKS007) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that makes a suggestion regarding the set value in a predetermined period.
The setting value of the plurality of steps includes at least a first setting value and a second setting value which is more disadvantageous than the first setting value (for example, 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player is most advantageous to the player). (Values up to 6 etc.),
In the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect, a first mode in which the ratio selected when the first set value is set is high and a ratio selected when the second set value is set are included. A high second aspect is included (for example, in "aspect 1", the higher the set setting value is, the higher the rate of determination is increased, while in "aspect 2", the set value is set. The lower the rate, the higher the rate of determination),
The setting suggestion effect executing means executes the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect for a longer period of time than the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect (for example, T2> T5 as shown in FIG. 9-8).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect, which suggests that the setting value is advantageous, is performed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the following gaming machines (8) to (12). Conventionally, in a game machine, an advantageous suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled and an advantageous suggestion effect before the advantageous suggestion effect is executed, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-131277. There was something that was configured to be feasible with a preparatory production that foretold that it would be executed. However, in such a game machine, if another effect is executed during the execution of the effect that raises the degree of expectation, there is a possibility that the interest may be lowered, and in view of this point, the interest is preferably enjoyed. It is required to provide a game machine that can maintain the above.

The gaming machine (8) is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and an advantageous suggestion effect (for example, hold display) that suggests that the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state. An advantage suggestion effect execution means that can execute a notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc., and a preparatory effect (for example, hold display) that announces that the advantage suggestion effect will be executed before the advantage suggestion effect is executed. The advantage suggestion effect is different from the first advantage suggestion effect (for example, the hold display notice effect) and the first advantage suggestion effect, which is provided with a preparation effect execution means capable of executing the advance notice preparation effect, the timer preparation effect, etc. The preparatory production includes a second advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a timer effect) and a third advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a chance eye notice effect) different from the first advantageous suggestion effect and the second advantageous suggestion effect. A first preparatory effect (for example, a hold display advance notice preparatory effect) for notifying that the first advantageous suggestion effect will be executed, and a second preparatory effect (for example, timer preparation) for notifying that the second advantageous suggestion effect will be executed. The third advantageous suggestion effect, the first preparatory effect, and the second preparatory effect can be executed in parallel in the same period (see FIGS. 12-11 (A1) and (A2)), including the effect). The third advantageous suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparatory effect nor the second preparatory effect is executed than when either the first preparatory effect or the second preparatory effect is executed. (See, for example, FIG. 12-10).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

(9) In the game machine of (8) above, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed for different periods (for example, after the execution of the hold display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is completed. , The timer preparation effect is executed. (See FIG. 12-7 (D)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

(10) In the game machine of the above (8) or (9), the first advantageous suggestion effect has a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, first effect mode (blue), second effect mode (green), and third effect. Aspects (red) and the like. See FIG. 12-3 (A)), and the first preparatory effect is performed by a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, first effect mode (small effect) and second effect). A mode (large effect), etc., which is executed by any one of FIGS. 12-3 (B)), and a feasible first advantageous suggestion depending on which effect mode the first preparatory effect is executed. The effect mode of the effect is different (for example, when the hold display notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the hold display notice effect is executed by any one of the first to third effect modes, and the second effect is executed. When the hold display notice preparation effect of the effect mode is executed, the hold display notice effect may be executed by any one of the second to third effect modes).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

(11) In any of the game machines (8) to (10) above, the advantageous suggestion effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparatory effect (for example, a hold display notice effect or a timer effect is executed). Then, when it is decided, the hold display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect may be determined not to be executed. Refer to FIGS. 12-3 (B) and 12-4 (B)), and the corresponding preparation effect is executed. The ease of execution differs depending on whether or not the timer is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-3, when the winning judgment result is a big hit, it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect and the hold display notice preparation effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4, it is easy to determine if the timer effect is also executed. However, if it is determined that the timer preparation effect is not executed, the hold display advance notice preparation that does not correspond to the timer effect may be determined. The timer effect may be executed more easily when the effect is executed than when the hold display advance notice preparation effect is not executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

(12) In any of the game machines (8) to (11) above, the ratio of which effect suggestion effect is executed differs depending on whether the preparatory effect is executed (for example). , When the effect mode of the hold display notice effect or the timer preparation effect is determined to be the second effect mode, it is determined that the hold display advance notice effect or the timer preparation effect is executed as compared with the case where the effect mode is determined to be the first effect mode. The ratio is high. See FIGS. 12-3 (B) and 12-4 (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a probabilistic state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a probabilistic state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the game control main process. It is a flowchart or the like which shows the random value value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display result determination module. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the lookahead notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination ratio such as whether or not the look-ahead chance eye is executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process such as a non-reach loss stop symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a predetermined display determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of whether or not the predetermined display is executed and the determination ratio thereof. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the type of a predetermined display and its determination ratio. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a final variation effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the production operation example in the case where the predetermined display and the count value display for each type are performed. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an ending effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an ending effect start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed and the determination ratio. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect and the determination ratio. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ending effect operation control processing with setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the waiting process per special figure. It is a time chart which shows the execution period such as an ending effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the ending effect and the like are executed. It is an enlarged view of the image display device of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table according to the variable display result. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the effect control command received on the effect control board side, and the processing content which is executed in the command analysis process according to the received effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lookahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the lamp lighting number determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the lighting pattern determination table when the number of hold is 4. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the lighting pattern determination table when the number of hold is 3. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the lighting pattern determination table when the number of hold is 2. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the light emission mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of lighting-off control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the lamp effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the lamp effect is executed. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), and (C) Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the lookahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern of the lookahead notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination processing in the rear variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. is there. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect decision processing in front part variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided, and (B) is the figure which shows the execution of the setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect in front variable display in the case, (C) is the figure which shows the effect pattern of the character effect and timer effect which is executed as suggestion effect in front variable display. (D) is a figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of a character effect and a timer effect, and the execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio as the suggestion effect in front variable display of a character effect and a timer effect in a modification, and the execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold memory display and the effect image in the modification. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion effect in the variable display of a normal reach, a non-reach without shortening, and a non-shortening non-reach in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lookahead notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the hold display notice effect decision table and hold display notice preparation effect decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the timer effect determination table and the timer advance notice preparation effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the chance eye notice production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lookahead advance notice execution processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of execution timing of the hold display notice effect (preparation effect) and timer effect (preparation effect). It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect mode of the hold display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the chance eye notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the chance eye notice execution possibility determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the hold display notice preparation effect and the chance eye notice effect.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door (for special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Includes processing to make settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this process during opening of the big hit, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the large winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the large winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 048AK)
Next, the feature portion 048AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIG. 8-1, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly classified into a vertically long square frame-shaped outer frame, a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface, and a game. It is composed of a gaming machine frame (underframe) that supports and fixes the board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame, a glass door frame having a glass window can rotate between a door opening position that opens the front surface of the game machine frame and a door closing position that closes the front surface centering on the left side. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame is closed.

In addition, the frame for the game machine can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the frame for the game machine and the glass door frame. It is not possible to open the door.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a first reserved storage display area 207SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 207SG005U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U, the hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 207SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is a game. It is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where the ball can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is the left game area 207SG002L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

Although not shown, the main board 11 in the feature portion 048AK of the present embodiment is housed in the board case 207SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is mounted on the back of. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is also a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

The setting switching main body portion provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that the substrate case 207SG201 can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is used. The operation becomes possible by opening the frame for the gaming machine. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 207SG051. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. Although the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value is arranged on the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. It may be good (the same applies to the following feature part 063AK). Further, the set set value is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side as a set value designation command (the same applies to the following feature unit 063AK).

8-2 (A) to 8-2 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1272 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1272 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 5) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 6) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the jackpot game state when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 to 8-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value. Different (for example, if the set value is 1, the probability variation of the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability variation with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The jackpot probability multiplier in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot probability multiplier in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example, 5 times). ) May be set.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, FIGS. 8-2 (A), 8-3 (A), 8-4 (A), 8-5 (A), 8-6 (A), 8-7 (Fig. 8-7). As shown in A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, FIG. 8-2 (B), FIG. 8-3 (B), FIG. 8-4 (B), FIG. 8-5 (B), FIG. 8-6 (B), FIG. 8-7 ( As shown in B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the case, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. ..

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 8-10, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-11, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range of the hit determination values from 102 to 1346 is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, in each display result determination table, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as a reference regardless of the game state and the set value. The judgment value included in the common numerical range or the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the hit judgment is made regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is determined by using the determination value included in a continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) with the value 32767 as a reference as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to make A to big hit F). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-2 (A) to 8-7 (B) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined). Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. Further, the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as the effect switch (to execute the predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to a probability change state or a jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

Next, the jackpot type in the feature portion 048AK of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 8-12. FIG. 8-12 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as the big hit type in the first special figure and the second special figure, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed after the end of the big hit game, and the big hit shifts to the high accuracy high base state. The jackpot types from A to jackpot F (also called probabilistic jackpot) are set. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, once a big hit is made, 100% probability variation control is performed. It should be noted that, in either or both of the first special figure and the second special figure, after the end of the big hit game state, only the time saving control is executed and the big hit G shifts to the low probability high base state (also referred to as non-probability variable big hit). The jackpot type of jackpot H and the jackpot type of jackpot H whose probability variation control continues (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) may be set until the next jackpot. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither high accuracy control nor time saving control is executed after the jackpot game is completed.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed eight times (so-called eight rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player (so-called two rounds). It is a so-called "sudden" jackpot). Further, the jackpot game state by the "big hit D" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The jackpot game state by the "big hit E" is a normally open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit F" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player (so-called two rounds). It is a so-called "sudden" jackpot).

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control (probability variation state) executed after the end of the jackpot gaming states of "big hit A" to "big hit F" are performed a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot gaming state (features of this embodiment). Part 048AK ends when the special figure game (100 times) is executed, or when the big hit game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. Therefore, when the big hit occurs again, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state continuously occurs without going through the normal state, so-called consecutive villas. It becomes a state.

For example, when a big hit occurs, the ratio of determining the so-called sudden big hit such as the big hit C or the big hit F may be lowered in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, the ball ejection rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the ball ejection rate decreases as the set value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Just do it. In addition to this, the ratio of the jackpot type determined according to the set value may be different. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the ball output rate for the player. As described above, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Next, the processing in the game control main processing in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the game control main process performed in the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, after the interrupt is set to prohibit, the stack pointer is set, the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc. ), The setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like may be executed after the initial setting is performed.

When the processing in the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, a process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

When the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A. When the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A The process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process of.

In step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). When the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor is ON (step S4A). When the release sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? Whether or not it is determined (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), the set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to the process of step S8A. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), the set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to perform the process of step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the release sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds to step S8A as it is.

The setting value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted. This is the process to be performed. In the set value change process, a process of transmitting a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, A process of updating and storing a temporary set value as an actual set value at the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed according to the state of the lock switch.

In the set value confirmation process, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (the clear switch is off) with the gaming machine frame open. It is a process performed by doing. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, a display of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. The process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), the display or the like is terminated according to the state of the lock switch, and the setting is set for the effect control board 12. The process of sending the value confirmation end notification command is performed.

In the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round display are turned on from the start of each process, and the first hold display 25A, By starting the second hold display 25B and the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the clerk of the game hall, etc., is changing or setting the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It suffices if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display 1 may be any mode as long as it does not correspond to any of the big hits A to F shown. Further, the segments constituting the round display may be lit in different modes at the start of the set value change process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. (Step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as another process, for example, depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 recovers whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or in a state before the power failure (starts by a hot start). ), Performs processing according to each (step S10A), and ends the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clear processing, data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag is cleared by storing "00H" in an address other than the first address (F000) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. Processing is done. In the RAM clear processing, instead of clearing the data other than the set value, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (the address F000 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment). It may be possible to clear only the game information stored in (F003 or later of ~ FXXX).

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor for a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, only a part of the segments may be blinked, or at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor may be turned on. Further, in the processing in the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), the recovery from the power failure during the setting change, and the like. A process of transmitting an error designation command according to an abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Further, as a notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change, the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display that constitute the display monitor are displayed. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the parts. Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall). The occurrence notification of an error may be executed by the monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B.

According to this, when an abnormal set value is set or when the setting value is changed and the power is restored from the power failure, an error due to the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, or the second special symbol display device 4B occurs. Since the occurrence notification of the above is executed, the clerk of the amusement park can recognize from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the power failure during the change of the set value has been recovered. It becomes. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Become.

FIG. 8-14 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in the process of step S101 of FIG. 5 as a winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 048AK, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIG. 8-15) described later. The result) is set as "big hit" to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and the special figure display result is set to "small hit" to determine whether to control to the small hit gaming state. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes this winning random value determination process at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). , It is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. .. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes the look-ahead advance notice effect such as the hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-14, the CPU 103 first checks the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 or the like, thereby causing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to perform. Identify the current gaming state (207SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of the 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the first address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 8-14 (B)) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, the special figure display result determination table according to the current game state, the start opening buffer value, and the set value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIG. 8-16, a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing" is performed.

As shown in FIG. 8-16, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 indicates a numerical value range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and a random number value MR1 for determining the specified special figure display result. It is compared with the data (207SGS571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS571). At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined by the 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, when it is determined by the 207SGS572 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (207SGS572; N), the small hit determination in the set special figure display result determination table The numerical range of the value is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result (207SGS573), and the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the predetermined small hit determination range. It is determined whether or not it is within (207SGS574).

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that the numerical data is a small hit in the variable display (207SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined by the 207SGS574 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the small hit is not achieved in the variable display (207SGS574; N), it is determined that the variable display is out of range (207SGS575). ).

Returning to FIG. 8-14 (A), it is confirmed by 207SGS575 whether or not it is determined that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS526), and when it is determined that the large hit is not obtained (207SGS526; N), in the variable display in 207SGS525. When it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a small hit (207SGS527) and it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, when it is determined that the variable display is out of order (207SGS526; N), the variable display result is "out of order". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (207SGS527a), and whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state. (207SGS528).

When the 207SGS526 determines that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command in the case of jackpot A, a third symbol designation command in the case of jackpot B, and a fourth symbol in the case of jackpot C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol designation command, the fifth symbol designation command when it is a jackpot D, the sixth symbol designation command when it is a jackpot E, and the seventh symbol designation command when it is a jackpot F (207SGS534). ), Then, as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern, a jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the jackpot type is selected and set (207SGS535), and the process proceeds to 207SGS536.

Further, when the 207SGS527 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the eighth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit". (207SGS531), select and set the variation pattern determination table for small hits (207SGS532), and proceed to 207SGS536.

If the time reduction flag is not set in 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set (207SGS529), and if the time reduction flag is set (207SGS528; Y). ), The deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set (207SGS530). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 048AK, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 is determined. Table B and the deviation pattern determination table C used when the total number of pending storages is 5 or more are prepared in advance, but in the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach variation pattern is used. On the other hand, in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take, 1 to 450 when the set value 1 is 1, 1 to 430 when the set value is 2, and 1 to 1 when the set value is 3. 410, when the set value is 4, 1-390 is assigned, when the set value is 5, 1-370 is assigned, and when the set value is 6, 1-350 are assigned.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, for non-reach variation patterns, the set value is 1 to 500 when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. 2 is 1 to 480, 3 is 1 to 460, 4 is 1 to 440, 5 is 1 to 420, and 6 is 1 to 1. 400 are assigned to each.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C and the deviation pattern determination table D, when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take for the non-reach variation pattern. 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, set. When the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the deviation pattern determination tables, 701 to 997 of the range that the random value MR3 for dynamic pattern determination can take for the fluctuation pattern of super reach is assigned regardless of the set value. There is.

Therefore, in the 207SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, the non-reach and super reach determinations are determined by changing the number of reserved memories after the determination. Is always a non-reach or super-reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D. ..

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, the variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used to perform disturbance. The variation category according to the range of determination values including the numerical value MR3 is determined (207SGS536). In this feature unit 048AK, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), when at least the variable display result is “off”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable category, variable display mode of "super reach", variable category other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit), and "other" variable category. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of the 207SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (207SGS537), the random number value determination process at the time of winning is terminated. The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the number of second special symbol hold storage is "0" (207SGS541). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of the 207SGS541, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in the 207SGS541 (207SGS541; N), the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B corresponding to the hold number "1". , The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of 207SGS542, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS543).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer to "2" (207SGS544), the process shifts to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (207SGS545). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of the 207SGS545, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads out the first hold storage number count value stored in the first hold storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Good. As described above, the process of 207SGS545 is executed when it is determined by 207SGS541 that the number of reserved second special figure is "0", and whether or not the number of reserved first special figure is "0". Is determined. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the number of the first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in the 207SGS545 (207SGS545; N), the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". , The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of the 207SGS546, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit 207SG151A are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS547).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer to "1" (207SGS548), the process shifts to 207SGS549.

In the 207SGS549, for example, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 or the like (207SGS549). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of the 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the start address of the RAM 102 and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not the determination used set value is stored (207SGS551). When it is determined that the judgment used setting value is stored (207SGS551: Y), the setting value specified by 207SGS550 is compared with the stored judgment used setting value (207SGS552), and the specified setting value is compared. It is determined whether or not the determined used set value stored in the above is the same (207SGS553).

When it is determined in the 207SGS553 that the specified set value and the stored determination used set value are not the same (207SGS553: N), an error specification command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is issued to the effect control board 12. Along with making settings for transmission (207SGS554), a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGS555), and a loop is performed. Enter the process. After that, since the CPU 103 does not execute other processing, the pachinko gaming machine is put into a non-gaming state (non-gaming state) by the loop processing. The error designation command is transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is stored in the set value (determined used set value) referred to when the previous variable display is executed and the current start address of the RAM 102. When the set values are different, the management device of the game hall can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the start address of the RAM 102 are different, so that the pachinko game can be played. The security of the machine 1 can be improved.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a non-gamable state by executing the loop processing and not executing other processing. The CPU 103 performs processing such as limiting the launch of the game ball, and not paying out the prize ball or variablely displaying the special symbol even if the game ball wins at each winning opening. By executing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-gamable state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 048AK, it is regarded as an abnormality that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, and the abnormality is detected in the management device of the amusement park. Although the recognizable form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B are blinked, or " By displaying "E.", the abnormality may be notified to the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 048AK, if the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 and the game is played. Although the embodiment in which the security signal is output to the field management device only once is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmission of these error specification commands and the output of the security signal are illustrated. May be repeatedly executed at predetermined period intervals in the above-mentioned incapacitated state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 048AK, if the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a non-gamable state. Although the mode to be controlled has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 performs a pachinko game. It is not necessary to control the machine 1 so that it cannot be played.

Further, when the determination used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different and the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inoperable state by the CPU 103 is not executed, for example, the game hall Only the output of the security signal to the management device of the above may be executed, or the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored in the start address of the RAM 102, which is the most disadvantageous value for the player (this). By setting 1) in the feature unit 048AK of the embodiment, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

Judgment in 207SGS551 When it is determined that the used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts with a cold start and executes the first variable display (207SGS551: N) or the set value specified in 207SGS553. If it is determined that the used setting value is the same as the stored determination used setting value (207SGS553: Y), the special figure display result determination table according to the current gaming state, start port buffer value, and set value is selected. And set (207SGS556). After that, the same process as the process executed in the variable display result determination module in the 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), that is, the process of 207SGS571 to 207SGS557 shown in FIG. 8-16 is performed (207SGS557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed whether or not the 207SGS557 determines that the variable display is a big hit (207SGS558), and when it is determined that the variable display is not a big hit (207SGS558; N), whether or not the 207SGS557 determines that the variable display is a small hit. Is confirmed (207SGS559).

When the 207SGS558 determines that a big hit will occur in the variable display (207SGS558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 8-12 (A) and 8-12 (B) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer and "big hit A" to "big hit F" in the jackpot type determination table. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be according to the determination ratio shown in the figure according to which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of the above is matched (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of the 207SGS563, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. Whether to control is decided before the definite special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type can be set. Remember. As an example, the jackpot type may be set to "1" to "6" according to "big hit A" to "big hit F".

On the other hand, when the 207SGS559 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS560 and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS560). ..

On the other hand, if the 207SGS559 does not determine that a small hit is obtained in the variable display, that is, if the variable display is not correct (207SGS559; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS565.

In the 207SGS565, whether or not to control the big hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set) is determined in advance, and whether or not to control the small hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set). In addition, a definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of the above, and further, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the predetermined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" by 207SGS558, for example, when the big hit type in 207SGS563 is "big hit A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is confirmed. Set to. When the jackpot type is "big hit B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the finalized special symbol. In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be "small hit" by 207SGS559 (when the small hit flag is set in 207SGS560), the special figure display result is set to "small hit" in advance. Corresponding to the determination result, the special symbol indicating the symbol "2" which is the small hit symbol is set as the finalized special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the fixed special symbol is set in the 207SGS565, the set value specified in the 207SGS553 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the determined used set value (207SGS566), and then the value of the special figure process flag is set to the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process. After updating to "1" (207SGS567), the special symbol normal processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (207SGS568), the special symbol is normal. End the process. In this demo display setting, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5, for example, is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Since the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment stores the determined used setting value as one of the game information in the RAM 102, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the first variable Although the mode in which the judgment used setting value does not exist when the display is executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the judgment used setting value is cleared by the RAM clear processing in the RAM 102. By storing in the area that is not set, even if the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, it is determined when the first variable display is executed. The used setting value and the setting stored in the start address of the RAM 102. The values (set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) may be compared.

In addition, in the feature part 048AK of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15, a mode in which a variable display result is determined using a variable display result determination module that executes common processing is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result determination module is provided with a set value specified by the CPU 103 (a set value stored at the start address of the RAM 102) and a determined used set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the game stopped state when the process to be compared (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in FIGS. 8-15) and the set value specified by the CPU 103 as a result of the process do not match the determined used set value. Processing (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 with the determined used set value and the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determined use as the processing result are used. Since the process of controlling the pachinko game machine 1 to the game stop state can be executed when the set values do not match, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, the process executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process (process in the lookahead advance notice setting process) performed in the lookahead advance notice setting process in step S161 of FIG. 7. In the process in the look-ahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 8-17, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received this time (step 048AKS001). If no new start winning command is received (step 048AKS001; No), the lookahead notice is not executed, so the process in the lookahead notice setting process ends.

When a new start winning command is received (step 048AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "1" (step 048AKS002), and the new start winning command is received. When the hold display number corresponding to the start winning command received in is "1" (step 048AKS002; Yes), the process in the read-ahead notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is not "1" (in the case of "2" to "4") (step 048AKS002; No), the execution prohibition condition of the look-ahead notice is satisfied. It is determined whether or not (step 048AKS003). The execution prohibition condition is a condition for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead notice, and here, the winning judgment result specification command included in the newly received start winning command specifies "no judgment". When, that is, when there is a judgment other than "non-reach" in the variable display executed before the target (the contents of the start winning command buffer are checked, and the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is displayed. When each winning judgment result specification command of the previous hold display number or the newly received start winning command is the first starting winning command, each winning command stored in the second starting winning command buffer This is a condition that is satisfied when there is a command that specifies a winning judgment result (judgment result equal to or higher than reach) other than "non-reach" in the judgment result specification command. The execution prohibition condition is also satisfied when it is already determined to execute the look-ahead chance eye in the variable display executed before the target (when the look-ahead chance eye flag described later is on). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by preventing the pre-reading chances for a plurality of targets from being executed. In addition to this, the look-ahead chance may be executed when the target is reach or higher. In addition, executing the look-ahead chance eye means executing the look-ahead notice effect by displaying the look-ahead chance eye.

When the execution prohibition condition of the lookahead notice is satisfied (step 048AKS003; Yes), the process in the lookahead notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the execution prohibition condition of the look-ahead notice is not satisfied (step 048AKS003; No), it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead chance eye (step 048AKS004). Specifically, in step 048AKS004, whether or not to execute the look-ahead chance eye according to the winning determination result and the type of the look-ahead chance eye when executing are determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-18. In the feature unit 048AK, as shown in FIG. 8-18, any one of “no execution”, “look-ahead chance eye A”, and “look-ahead chance eye B” is determined by the determined determination ratio shown in the figure. The look-ahead chance eye is an effect executed as a look-ahead notice, and the variable display of the decorative symbol executed before the target (when a plurality of variable displays are executed, each of the plurality of variable displays) is variablely displayed. As a result, it is an effect of deriving and displaying a predetermined chance eye (a non-reach chance eye when the reach is not established in the variable display).

In the feature unit 048AK, two types of look-ahead chance eyes are prepared, one is "look-ahead chance eye A" and the other is "look-ahead chance eye B". The "look-ahead chance eye A" and the "look-ahead chance eye B" have different target jackpot expectations and different chance eyes to stop (as shown in FIG. 8-18, the look-ahead chance eye A has "234". The predetermined chance eye is stopped, and in the look-ahead chance eye B, the predetermined chance eye of "345" is stopped.). It should be noted that the decorative pattern may be made to emit light when the chance eye is stopped. In this case, the "look-ahead chance eye A" and the "look-ahead chance eye B" are distinguished from each other by using different emission colors. You may try to do it. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher when the "look-ahead chance eye B" is executed than when the "look-ahead chance eye A" is executed.

In addition to this, for example, the determination ratio of the display result derived and displayed as the look-ahead chance may be different depending on the set value. For example, when a combination of odd-numbered decorative symbols such as 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 constitutes a look-ahead chance eye, a combination of "315" (good) is a look-ahead chance only when the set value is "6". It may be derived and displayed as an eye. Further, for example, in the case of a low setting, a combination in which the middle symbol and the right symbol have the same number, such as "133", "155", and "377", is derived and displayed as a look-ahead chance eye. (In addition, since the middle symbol and the right symbol have the same number in the predetermined display described later, in that case, one of them is referred to as the middle symbol so that the look-ahead chance eye and the predetermined display can be distinguished. Instead of the right symbol, the left symbol and the middle symbol may have the same number), and if the setting is high, the look-ahead chances are the same, such as "135", "357", and "379". It is also possible to increase the ratio of derivation and display of so-called combinations that do not include numbers. That is, the set value may be suggested according to the type of the pre-reading chance eye that is derived and displayed (the pre-reading chance eye may include the setting suggestion effect).

After returning to FIG. 8-17 and executing the process of step 048AKS004, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the look-ahead chance eye (step 048AKS005). When the look-ahead chance eye is not executed (step 048AKS005; No), the process in the look-ahead notice setting process ends. When executing the look-ahead chance eye (step 048AKS005; Yes), after setting the look-ahead chance eye flag indicating that the look-ahead chance eye is executed to the on state (step 048AKS006), the process in the look-ahead notice setting process ends. To do. The look-ahead chance eye flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

In addition, for example, a hold display notice effect is given to the hold of the target of the look-ahead chance so that the player can visually recognize which is the target of the look-ahead chance, and the target of the look-ahead chance is. The display mode of the hold display may be changed to a mode different from the normal mode. That is, when the look-ahead chance eye is executed, the hold display notice effect may be executed at the same time. In addition, the hold display notice may be executed separately from the look-ahead chance eye.

FIG. 8-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed by the feature unit 048AK. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-19, the effect control CPU 120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, so that the special figure display result is “missed”. It is determined whether or not the result is (step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing" (step S521; Yes), for example, the specified fluctuation pattern is read by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Determines whether or not is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" (step S522).

If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the look-ahead chance eye, the predetermined display, and the like are used as a combination of the final stop symbols that constitute the non-reach combination. Which of the displays other than the above is derived and displayed is determined by the non-reach loss stop symbol or the like determination process (step 048AKS010).

FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the non-reach loss stop symbol determination process executed in step 048AKS010 of FIG. 8-19. In the process of determining the non-reach loss stop symbol or the like shown in FIG. 8-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the look-ahead chance eye flag is set to the ON state (step 048AKS011). When the look-ahead chance eye flag is on (step 048AKS011; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 has a look-ahead chance eye of the type determined in step 048AKS004 of FIG. The decorative symbol of ", and the decorative symbol of" 345 "corresponding to the look-ahead chance B) are determined as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS012).

After executing the process of step 048AKS012, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation is immediately before the variation targeted at the look-ahead chance (the variation immediately before the target) (step 048AKS013). If it is not the change immediately before the target, the non-reach loss stop symbol determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation immediately before the target (step 048AKS013; Yes), the look-ahead chance eye flag is cleared to the off state (step 048AKS014) so that the look-ahead chance eye is not derived and displayed in the target change. Reach loss stop The process of determining the symbol, etc. is completed. Note that, for example, when the look-ahead chance eye is executed only when the target fluctuation is a fluctuation equal to or greater than the reach (when the look-ahead chance eye is not executed when the target fluctuation is a non-reach fluctuation), the target The look-ahead chance eye flag may be cleared to the off state at the end of the fluctuation of. In this way, the look-ahead chance eyes are continuously displayed from the time when the look-ahead chance eyes flag is set to the ON state to the change immediately before the change of the target. In addition, a plurality of fluctuations for displaying the look-ahead chance eyes are prepared in advance as a pattern (for example, when the target fluctuation is the fourth fluctuation and the target is changed three times, the first and third look-ahead chances are performed. A pattern for displaying the eyes, a pattern for displaying the look-ahead chance eyes for the second and third times, etc.), and the look-ahead chance eyes may be displayed according to the pattern.

When the look-ahead chance eye flag is off in step 048AKS011 (step 048AKS011; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined display determination process (step 048AKS015). In the feature unit 048AK, as a predetermined display, a combination of some decorative symbols among the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination is displayed at a different ratio according to the set set value, thereby giving suggestions regarding the set value. Perform setting suggestion effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23, the setting suggestion effect is performed by displaying the definite decorative symbols of the non-reach combinations of types A to C at different ratios according to the set values. Further, in the feature unit 048AK, the predetermined display is performed in the probability change state after the end of the big hit game state.

FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing an example of a predetermined display determination process performed in step 048AKS015 of FIG. 8-20. In the predetermined display determination process shown in FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the probability variation control is in progress (step 048AKS041). Whether or not the probability change control is in progress may be determined, for example, by reading the EXT data in the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11. When the probability change control is not in progress (step 048AKS041; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the predetermined display determination process. On the other hand, when the probability variation control is in progress (step 048AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the previous flag is on (step 048AKS042). The previous flag is a flag indicating whether or not the predetermined display is displayed in the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation (previous fluctuation) for which the predetermined display is displayed, and is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. It is provided.

When the previous flag is on, that is, when the predetermined display is displayed in the previous variation (step 048AKS042; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the predetermined display determination process. On the other hand, when the previous flag is off (step 048AKS042; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the predetermined display is displayed, that is, whether or not the setting suggestion effect for displaying the predetermined display is executed according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-22. It is determined (step 048AKS043), and the predetermined display determination process is terminated. As described above, in the feature unit 048AK, when the predetermined display is displayed in the previous fluctuation, the predetermined display is not displayed, thereby preventing the predetermined display from being continuously displayed. On the other hand, the look-ahead chance eye, which is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation, is displayed continuously with a plurality of fluctuations as described above, so it is a setting that suggests a set value whether it is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation. It makes it easier for the player to recognize whether it is a suggestive effect, and prevents the player from being confused with the look-ahead chance by displaying the predetermined display continuously. In this example, an example of determining whether or not the predetermined display was displayed in the previous fluctuation is shown. For example, the number of consecutive times is counted, and if the number of consecutive times is 2, the predetermined display can be displayed. If it is three times, it may be restricted not to display the predetermined display. Further, the number of times that the predetermined display is continuously displayed may differ depending on the set value that has been set. According to this, the variation of the production is increased and the game entertainment can be improved. Hereinafter, executing the setting suggestion effect by displaying the predetermined display is simply referred to as executing the predetermined display.

FIG. 8-25 is a diagram showing a determination ratio for determining whether or not to execute the predetermined display. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 048AK, whether or not the player is in the so-called consecutive villa state (whether or not the consecutive villa flag described later is on), that is, whether or not it is the first big hit. Depending on the situation, the ratio of determining that the predetermined display is executed is different. In the illustrated example, the determination ratio is set so that the predetermined display is not executed when the villa is in a row. According to this, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily guessed by executing the predetermined display in the so-called consecutive villa state, and to attract the attention of the player after the end of the first big hit. It should be noted that the predetermined display may be executed at a small rate such as 2% even during the consecutive villas.

After returning to FIG. 8-20 and executing the process of step 048AKS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the predetermined display, that is, whether or not the predetermined display is present (step 048AKS016). When there is a predetermined display (step 048AKS016; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the predetermined display to be executed according to the set value according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-23 (step 048AKS017).

FIG. 8-23 is a diagram showing a determination ratio for determining the type of predetermined display to be executed. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 048AK, predetermined displays of types A to C are prepared in advance, in type A, a combination of “344” decorative symbols is derived and displayed, and in type B, “399” decorative symbols are derived and displayed. The combination of the above is derived and displayed, and in the type C, the combination of the decorative symbols of "577" is derived and displayed. Then, it is suggested that the higher settings are made in the order of type A <type B <type C. In this example, an example suggesting which setting value is used is shown. For example, the setting value has been changed, the setting value is odd or even, and the minimum "1" setting If it is a suggestion about a set value, such as not being a value, the suggestion may be different. Further, there may be a predetermined display of a type that is displayed only when the set value is set high. The high setting may be the setting value of the upper half such as 4 to 6 out of 1 to 6, or the upper two such as 5 and 6. The setting value 6, which is the highest setting value, is referred to as the highest setting value.

After returning to FIG. 8-20 and executing the process of step 048AKS017, the effect control CPU 120 determines a predetermined display (combination of determined decorative symbols) of the type determined in step 048AKS017 as the final stop symbol (step). 048AKS018). Subsequently, the previous flag is set to the ON state (step 048AKS019), the count value provided according to the predetermined display type is added by 1 (step 048AKS020), and then the non-reach loss stop symbol determination process is terminated. The count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display is the count value provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the predetermined display of the types A to C is displayed during the probable change state (only when the state is not the continuous villa state). It is for counting the number of times displayed. In step 048AKS020, the count value corresponding to the predetermined display of the type determined as the final stop symbol is added by 1. The count value is referred to in the final variation effect setting process (see FIG. 8-24) described later, displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-25 (f), and then cleared.

When it is determined in step 048AKS016 of FIG. 8-20 that there is no predetermined display (step 048AKS016; No), the effect control CPU 120 is not a combination of the predetermined display and the decorative symbol that serves as a look-ahead chance (other than the predetermined display, etc.). The reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS021). As an example, in the process of step 048AKS021, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left-determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined left-determined value stored in advance in a ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table or the like, among the confirmed decorative symbols, the left confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and a predetermined right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. The right fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Even if the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined display and the look-ahead chance eye (predetermined display, etc.) are not selected in advance from each confirmed symbol determination table so as not to be a combination of the predetermined display and the decorative symbol that becomes the look-ahead chance eye. Alternatively, when the combination of decorative symbols is decided, if the combination of the decorative symbols matches the predetermined display or the like, the lottery may be performed again. Further, in the process of step 048AKS021, for example, in the case of not in the probabilistic state, the combination of decorative symbols same as the predetermined display may be displayed at a lower rate than in the case of the special state, regardless of the set value. It may be there.

After executing the process of step 048AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 finishes the process of determining the non-reach loss stop symbol, etc. after clearing the flag to the off state last time (step 048AKS022). In this way, when the look-ahead chance eye is executed, the look-ahead chance eye is executed with priority over the predetermined display. The look-ahead chance is executed regardless of whether or not it is in the probabilistic state, whereas the predetermined display is being controlled to the probabilistic state and is executed only after the end of the first jackpot game state (that is,). It is not executed in the state of consecutive villas). Further, while the look-ahead chance eyes are continuously displayed with a plurality of fluctuations, the predetermined display is not continuously displayed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player in the probabilistic state, make it easier for the player to recognize whether it is the pre-reading chance eye or the predetermined display, and improve the interest. Even when the look-ahead chance is displayed, the predetermined display may be prioritized in the case of the probability change state. In this case, if the final stop symbol after the predetermined display is displayed as the pre-reading chance eye, the player may be confused. Therefore, if the predetermined display is prioritized, the pre-reading chance for a predetermined period You may limit the execution of the eyes. Specifically, the execution of the look-ahead chance may be restricted until the predetermined display is displayed five times. Further, the execution of the look-ahead chance eye may be restricted from the time when the predetermined display is displayed 5 times until the 3 times variation is completed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by displaying the look-ahead chance eyes continuously on the display of the predetermined display. In addition, the consecutive villa state is once controlled to the big hit game state, and then becomes the consecutive villa state by becoming a big hit again during the probability change state after the end (the consecutive villa flag is set to the on state). In addition, after the villa state is reached, the probabilistic change control is performed a predetermined number of times without a big hit again, and the process ends (the villa flag is cleared to the off state).

Returning to FIG. 8-19, when it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S522; No). Step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left / right confirmation symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined left / right determination stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is performed. By referring to the symbol determination table, etc., among the finalized decorative symbols, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 are the same. Determine the decorative pattern of. Further, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 and referring to a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not "missing" (step S521; No), the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability" (big hit C or big hit F). There is), or it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" or a case other than these (step S525). When it is determined to be "probability" or "small hit" (step S525; Yes), a definite decoration that becomes the final stop symbol corresponding to the case of "probability" or "small hit" such as the opening chance eye. The combination of symbols is determined (step S527). As an example, in response to the case where any of the fluctuation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, it is confirmed that the final stop symbol constituting one of the plurality of types of open chance eyes is used. Determine the combination of decorative patterns. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the chance eye to be updated by the random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and the predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Therefore, the combination of the definite decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chance eyes may be determined.

After executing any of the processes of step 048AKS010, step S524, and step S527, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the final variation is in the probabilistic state (step 048AKS031). In step 048AKS031, for example, when the probability variation control is performed in 100 fluctuations after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is controlled to the probability variation state and it is determined whether or not it is the 100th variation. In the case of final variation (step 048AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the final variation effect setting process (step 048AKS032).

FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the final variation effect setting process performed in step 048AKS032 of FIG. 8-19. The final variation effect setting process is a process performed when the probability variation state ends without becoming a big hit. In the final variation effect setting process, the frequency of the displayed predetermined display is set to be visually displayed to the player for each type, or the number of balls acquired during the consecutive villa is set to be visually displayed to the player. Will be. In the final variation effect setting process shown in FIG. 8-24, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the consecutive villa flag is set to the ON state, that is, whether or not the consecutive villa is in the villa (step 048AKS051).

When not in the villa, that is, when the villa flag is off (step 048AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 is set to display the respective count values provided according to the predetermined display type (for each type). (Count value display setting of) is performed (step 048AKS052). In step 048AKS052, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (f), a setting is made to display the appearance frequencies of types A to C by a bar graph. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 clears each value of the count values provided according to the type of the predetermined display to 0, and if the previous flag is on, clears it to the off state, and sets the acquired ball output count value to 0. After clearing (step 048AKS053), the final variation effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 048AKS051 that the villa is in the villa, that is, when the villa flag is on (step 048AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of balls acquired during the villa. (Step 048AKS054). In addition, the number of balls (acquired balls) acquired during the consecutive villas starts counting because it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the consecutive villas are not, it is cleared by the above step 048AKS053 and the consecutive villas If so, it is cleared in step 048AKS056 described later. That is, it suffices that the balls that are acquired in the jackpot game state are continuously counted during the period from when the consecutive villa flag is turned on to when it is turned off.

After executing the process of step 048AKS054, the effect control CPU 120 clears the consecutive villa flag to the off state (step 048AKS055), and shifts to the process of step 048AKS053 described above.

Returning to FIG. 8-19, when it is determined in step S525 that the value is other than "probability" or "small hit" (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, and jackpot E) (step S525; No), A combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the jackpot combination is determined (step S526). As an example, in the process of step S527, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol updated by a random counter of RAM 122 or the like is extracted, and then a predetermined jackpot confirmed symbol stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the determination table or the like, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" on the screen of the image display device 5 are the same. Determine the decorative pattern. At this time, it may be determined that a different decorative symbol is set as the final decorative symbol depending on which of the jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, and jackpot E is the jackpot type.

After executing either the process of step S526 or the process of step 048AKS032, or when it is determined in step 048AKS031 that the final fluctuation is not in the probabilistic state (step 048AKS031; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets other effect execution settings. (Step S530). For example, an effect in which a predetermined sound effect (for example, an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, etc.) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a predetermined timing at the start or during execution of the variable display, or a game effect. Immediately announce (deterministically) that the variable display result will be a "big hit" by executing the effect of a predetermined mode including a part or all of the effect of the mode in which the flash lamp included in the lamp 9 or the like shines. The effect of one notification mode may be executed. Alternatively, as a notice effect during fluctuation, an effect of displaying a special effect image (premium image) corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit" may be executed.

As another example, in the process of step S530, regardless of the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit", for example, a setting for executing the effect of a predetermined mode for liveliness may be made. More specifically, it suffices to be able to perform a predetermined mode of effect, such as an effect in which a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 illuminates, or an effect of displaying a predetermined effect image as a mini character.

After that, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S531). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects, for example, one of a plurality of prepared special figure variation effect control patterns in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, and sets the pattern to be used. After executing the process of step S531, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command (step S532). Subsequently, the setting for starting the fluctuation of the decorative pattern and the like in the image display device 5 is made (step S533). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the special figure fluctuation effect control pattern determined as the pattern to be used in step S532 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S534), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 8-25 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a predetermined display or a count value display for each type is performed. In the illustrated example, a predetermined display of type A is executed, not in the consecutive villas. Further, it is a probability change state, and the probability change control is performed until the fluctuation is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game state. Fluctuations are initiated as shown in FIG. 8-25 (a). It is assumed that FIG. 8-25 (a) shows the 99th change after the end of the big hit game state. When it is determined to execute the predetermined display in the fluctuation and the type is type A, the combination of decorative symbols of "344" as shown in FIG. 8-25 (b) (determined in step 048AKS018 of FIG. 8-20). The combination of the decorative patterns) is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (c), the 100th variation, that is, the final variation in the probability variation state is started, and as shown in FIG. 8-25 (c), the lost symbol (step 048AKS021 in FIG. 8-20). The combination of decorative patterns determined in the above) is derived and displayed. As a result, the probability change state ends. At the end of the probabilistic state, after the end of the final variation, a message indicating that effect (a message indicating the end of the ST mode, which is the probabilistic state) is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-25 (e). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (f), the count value for each type set in the process of step 048AKS052 in FIG. 8-24 is displayed (graph is displayed for each type), which is a normal state. It will shift to the mode.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, in the display result determination table, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Regardless of the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Then, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), it corresponds to each set value from 1238. The range up to the value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are set with the hit judgment value 1020 as the big hit reference value. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to a non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

In particular, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, there are a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value. It is not necessary to execute the determination of whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times as compared with the case where it is provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, in the display result determination table, the above-mentioned hit determination value is obtained regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state. Since 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. Is whether the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and from 1020 to the non-common numerical range according to the probability variation state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot game state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The number of judgment values included in the range is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the number of judgment values included in the second special figure display result is different. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself uses 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value). It is set. Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the number is within, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is set in a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value is 6, whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. When determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value, it is controlled to the small hit gaming state. When determining whether or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. Therefore, the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state.

Further, the RAM 102 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment can store the installation value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is stored in the RAM 102 every time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). While reading the set value, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value corresponding to the read set value are set (the display result judgment table according to the set value is set), and the jackpot game state is set. It is determined whether or not to control. That is, the CPU 103 reads the set value from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read set value. Therefore, the improper set value is read and the improper variable display is performed. It is possible to prevent the display result from being determined.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, a mode in which a set value is read from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed and a display result determination table is set according to the read set value is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the CPU 103 may read a set value from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and set a display result determination table according to the read set value. .. When setting the display result determination table according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in this way, the setting is made during the period until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected. All variable display results may be judged using the display result judgment table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and reads the read set value and the previous variable display result. A setting value read from the RAM 102 (judgment used setting value) is compared for judgment, and if the setting value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the judgment used setting value as the comparison result, an image is displayed. Since the error notification is executed by the image displayed on the display device 5, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined due to reading out an inappropriate set value. Further, it is possible not only to more accurately identify that an inappropriate set value is set in the RAM 102, but also to make the surroundings of the game machine recognize that the set value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can quickly deal with the abnormal set value.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, a mode in which the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value are compared each time the variable display is executed is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be executed a predetermined number of times of variable display or may be executed based on the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, the CPU 103 compares the set value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used set value, and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the determined used set value as the comparison result, the effect is produced. An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103. It is possible to more reliably prevent the determination of an inappropriate variable display result from being performed by reading.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 to 8-16, the CPU 103 is variable by using a variable display result determination module common to both when the winning random number value determination is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed. Since the display result is determined, a part of the processing can be shared between when the random value determination at the time of winning is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, if the fluctuation special figures are the same, a small hit is made regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the numerical range of the determination value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (to the set value read from the RAM 102). Since the display result determination table is set according to the situation), the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced. Further, as in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the RAM 102 When setting the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the set value read from, the process for setting the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value read from the RAM 102 is standardized. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, when 1 (the set value having the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set. Is not set, so if 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it should be determined whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the feature part 048AK of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, the embodiment in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, a mode in which the small hit reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK, the combination of some decorative symbols among the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination is displayed at a different ratio according to the set set value as a predetermined display while the probability change state is controlled. To do. In addition to the predetermined display, the look-ahead chance eye composed of the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination is also displayed as the variable display result, so that the variation of the production can be increased and the game interest can be improved. Further, the look-ahead chance eyes may also be displayed at different ratios according to the set value. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because it is suggested which set value is set by the variable display result during the control to the probabilistic state.

Further, the probability change state is caused by the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the big hit game state, or the jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. finish. That is, if the jackpot game state is not reached again, the probability change state continues until at least a predetermined number of special figure games are executed. Therefore, even if the hobby is controlled to the probabilistic state and the normal state is reached without being controlled to the big hit game state again, it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed by displaying the predetermined display.

Further, the feature unit 048AK displays different types of predetermined displays at different ratios according to the set set values for the predetermined displays of types A to C. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to which type of predetermined display is displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK, the non-reach combination definite decorative symbol constituting the look-ahead chance eye is a combination of symbols different from the non-reach combination definite decorative symbol constituting the predetermined display. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the look-ahead effect and the setting suggestion effect, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being confused with the notice effect of the jackpot expectation. Further, while the look-ahead chance eye can be continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, the predetermined display is restricted so as not to be continuously displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined display from being confused with the look-ahead notice exercise by being displayed continuously.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK, after being controlled to the probabilistic state, at the timing controlled to the normal state, the count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display is displayed, so that the frequency of the predetermined display can be determined. Make it recognizable to others. According to this, the player can confirm the frequency at which the predetermined result is displayed, and it is possible to easily predict the set value. In addition, the count value displayed according to the type of the predetermined display is displayed when the consecutive villa flag is off, that is, at the timing when the normal state is reached without becoming a big hit again after being once controlled to the probability change state. Only done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily guessed by displaying the count value at the time of consecutive villas. On the other hand, in the case of being in a consecutive villa, instead of displaying the count value provided according to the type of predetermined display, the number of balls acquired during the consecutive villa is displayed at the timing when the normal state is reached. .. According to this, the winning balls in the consecutive villas are displayed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Modification example of feature part 048AK)
As shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, the feature unit 048AK sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) to the large hit determination value regardless of the gaming state and the set value. Although it is provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range of, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification, as shown in FIGS. 8-26 (A) and 8-26 (B), the game Regardless of the state or the set value, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value may be continuously provided.

When the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is increased. By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is 1024 to 1237. Is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is a reference value for the small hit determination value) so that the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

When the game state is the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346, and the small hit judgment is made. The common numerical range of values is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value increases from the normal state or the time saving state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. Set to (reference value). When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

Further, as a mode for setting the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) to be continuous in this way, as shown in FIG. 8-27, The numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the big hit judgment value is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. A common numerical range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Further, in this case, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is changed according to the set value. Therefore, the jackpot probability may be different according to the set value.

When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIG. 8-27, when determining the variable display result, the CPU 103 first determines the value of the random number value MR1. Is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the jackpot determination value (in the example shown in FIG. 8-27, the setting value 1 is 64990, the setting value 2 is 64974, and the setting value 3 is 64954). When it is determined that the value of the numerical value MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the jackpot determination value, it is further variable by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or greater than 65208, which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It suffices to determine whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit. By determining the variable display in this way, the variable display result is determined without executing both the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit and the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the determination of the variable display result of the CPU 103.

As described above, in FIGS. 8-26 and 8-27, the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value). Common numerical range of common numerical range and small hit judgment value, when 2 to 6 are set as set values for pachinko gaming machine 1, common numerical range of big hit judgment value, non-common numerical range and small hit judgment value The common numerical range) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020, which is the reference value of the big hit judgment value, and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the big hit judgment regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from the numerical range of values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value, so that the large hit game state or the small hit game state It is possible to determine whether or not to control. Further, when it is determined that the control is performed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the big hit game is determined by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value in the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control the state or the small hit game state, the processing load for determining whether the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and the determination whether to control the small hit game state. It is possible to reduce the processing load of performing the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, when the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state by the CPU 103, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from the jackpot reference value of 1020, and the increased jackpot determination value. Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the numerical range of, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the large hit gaming state within the numerical range in which the number of the large hit determination values has increased, and the small hit gaming state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state are reduced. be able to.

Further, also in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-26 and 8-27, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Since the CPU 103 only needs to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the jackpot gaming state is reduced. can do.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 8-26 and 8-27, a mode in which the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value has been illustrated. The numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the figure As shown in 8-28 and FIG. 8-29, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to different numerical ranges.

When the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are set to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value ( The non-common numerical range (judgment included in the non-common numerical range) when the small hit judgment value common numerical range) is a numerical range different from the big hit judgment value common numerical range and the big hit judgment value setting value is 6. In a numerical range different from the numerical range with the largest number of values), a continuous numerical range from the reference value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in FIG. 8-28, 32767 to 33421 in FIG. 8-29, in any case. The reference value of the small hit determination value may be set to 32767).

In the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the reference value of the small hit determination value is common according to the fluctuation special chart, but the determination value included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although the forms in which the numbers are different are illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of judgment values included in the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value regardless of the fluctuation special chart. May be the same as.

As described above, in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. There is. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2 to 6, a numerical value different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value). In the range, the range corresponding to the set value with 60000 as the reference value (60,000 to 60016 for the set value 2, 60000 to 60035 for the set value 3 ... 60000 to 60109 for the set value 6) is a big hit. It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value according to the change of the set value. Therefore, the development of the pachinko gaming machine related to the set value. The load can be reduced. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control the big hit game state and determining whether or not to control the small hit game state by the CPU 103.

In particular, since the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value to the jackpot gaming state with the same value of 60000 as the reference value regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 can determine the jackpot. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game state.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, as in the case of the feature portion 048AK described above, when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. Is not set, the CPU 103 may determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.

Further, in the forms shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is the common numerical range of the large hit determination value regardless of the set value. In a numerical range different from the non-common numerical range, 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) and is set to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094). That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of set values regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 has the same value regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with 32767 as the small hit reference value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state of the CPU 103.

In the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, while the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the pachinko game When 1 is set as the set value for the machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when 2 or more is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it corresponds to each set value. Although the embodiment in which the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value is not set. A common numerical range may be set. Even when 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when setting a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, the reference is the same as in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29. The range from 1238, which is a value, to a value corresponding to each set value may be set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the smallest, and the jackpot determination value increases as the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. By expanding the non-common numerical range of, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of determination values included is different according to the variation special map, the fluctuation special map is the first in the CPU 103. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit game state using 32767, which is the same value in the case of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure, as a reference value, it is possible to control the small hit game state by the CPU 103. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to use it.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the form in which the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the minimum value of the non-common numerical range is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates The present invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value or is not common. Whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state is determined based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range, and whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although a mode for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state is illustrated based on the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is in the big hit game state by a method other than that shown in the feature unit 048AK. It may be determined whether or not to control the game and whether or not to control the small hit game state. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number value MR1 and it may be determined whether or not to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the value of the calculation result. Further, a calculation is performed on the value of the random number value MR1, and a big hit game state or a small hit game is performed based on whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535 which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). It may be determined whether or not to control the state.

Further, in the above embodiment, the probability variation control is always performed after the end of the big hit game state, and the special figure game of a predetermined number of times (100 times) is finished, or the next big hit game state is started. , An example of continuing until any one of the end conditions is satisfied first, but for example, the probability variation control may be continued until the next big hit game state is started (predetermined number of times (100 times). ) The end of the special figure game does not have to be the end condition of the probability variation control). In such a case, a jackpot type (non-probability change jackpot type) that is not controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state is prepared, and the predetermined special figure game ends after the end of the non-probability change jackpot game state. The associative state may end at the timing when the time saving control controlled up to is completed. In such a game machine, it is possible to display a predetermined display even during control in a time saving state as well as in a probability changing state.

Further, in such a game machine, although the probabilistic state continues until the next big hit game state is started, it may take a long time until the variable display result becomes a big hit (in the so-called consecutive villa). Hamari state). Therefore, for example, when the number of game balls that have won the variable winning ball device 6B exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined that the player has entered the hamari state in the consecutive villa, and the setting suggestion effect is performed according to the set value. May be good. In addition, a launch sensor may be provided to determine that the player has entered the hamari state in the consecutive villa because the number of launches of the game balls exceeds a predetermined number, and a setting suggestion effect may be performed according to the set value. Furthermore, an out sensor is provided at the out port where the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in, and it is determined that the number of out balls exceeds a predetermined number and the player has entered the state of being in a row. , The setting suggestion effect may be performed according to the set value. According to this, it is possible to improve the game entertainment in the so-called villa state, and to promote the launch. In the setting suggestion effect, for example, the sound may be output, a specific character may be displayed, or both may be performed according to the set setting value.

Further, in the above embodiment, after the message indicating the end of the ST mode in the probabilistic state is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-25 (e), the predetermined display is displayed as it is as shown in FIG. 8-25 (f). An example is shown in which the count values provided according to the types of are displayed in a graph for each type, but this is an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (e), after a message indicating the end of the ST mode in the probabilistic state is displayed, the player is urged to operate the push button 31B (for example, a message such as pressing a button is displayed). , A button image, etc.), and based on the push sensor 35B detecting the movement of the player with respect to the push button 31B, the count value provided according to the predetermined display type may be displayed. Good. According to this, it is possible to execute the production according to the preference of the player. If the movement by the player is not detected, it is not necessary to display the count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display.

(Explanation of feature part 063AK)
Next, the feature portion 063AK of the present embodiment will be described. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK also has 100% probability variation control after the end of the big hit game state once a big hit is made, as in the feature unit 048AK. It shall be. That is, it is assumed that the big hit types of "big hit A" to "big hit F" shown in FIG. 8-12 are prepared as the big hit types as in the feature unit 063AK. In the pachinko gaming machine in the feature unit 063AK, only the time saving control is executed in either or both of the first special figure and the second special figure after the end of the big hit game state, and the state shifts to the low accuracy high base state. A jackpot type of jackpot G (also referred to as non-probability variation jackpot) or a jackpot type of jackpot H in which probability variation control continues (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) until the next jackpot may be set. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither high accuracy control nor time saving control is executed after the jackpot game is completed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK of the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed in the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state. Then, in the setting suggestion effect performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK, the execution mode of the mode 1 in which the ratio of selection is high when the setting value is set to be advantageous to the player and the execution mode of the player There is an execution mode of the second aspect in which the ratio of selection is high when the setting value is set to an unfavorable value, and the execution mode of the first aspect has a longer execution period of the setting suggestion effect than the execution mode of the second aspect. It has the characteristic of being.

Such a feature is due to the following background. Generally, when an effect (advantageous effect) for notifying an advantage is executed, a player takes an image or a moving image of the effect with a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on member registration-based websites such as Networking Services, and Internet video sharing sites. However, if the execution period of the advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, with regard to the production (disadvantageous production) that is often performed in a disadvantageous case, there is no desire to shoot, so if the execution period of the disadvantageous production is long, the player will be uncomfortable. There is. Therefore, in the feature unit 063AK, the execution period for the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period for the unfavorable effect is shorter than that for the advantageous effect to reduce discomfort. It has the characteristics of. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK having such features will be described. It should be noted that the description of the same parts as those described in the above basic explanation and the feature portion 048AK will be omitted.

FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S177 of FIG. 7 as the ending effect process. In the ending effect processing shown in FIG. 9-1, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect in-progress flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS001). The ending effect in progress flag is a flag indicating that the ending effect is being executed, and is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. The ending effect in-progress flag is set to the on state by the process of step 063AKS004 described later, and is cleared to the off state by the process of step 063AKS012.

When the ending effect in-progress flag is off (step 063AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (step 063AKS002). The ending command is, for example, a command transmitted from the main board 11 side in the process of step S117 of FIG. 5, and is a command indicating to start execution of the ending effect. If the ending command has not been received (step 063AKS002; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the ending effect process. The ending command includes an execution period of the ending effect. In the feature unit 063AK, as in the feature unit 048AK, the jackpot types of "big hit A" to "big hit F" shown in FIG. 8-12 are prepared, but the ending effect is executed regardless of the jackpot type. The period is common (eg 20 seconds).

On the other hand, when the ending command is received (step 063AKS002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the ending effect start setting process for starting the effect operation to be the ending effect (step 063AKS003). After that, after setting the ending effect in-progress flag to the on state (step 063AKS004), the ending effect process ends.

FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect start setting process executed in step 063AKS003 of FIG. 9-1. In the ending effect start setting process shown in FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-3 (step 063AKS021). In the example shown in FIG. 9-3, regardless of the set value, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is determined by the determined ratio shown in the figure, but the execution ratio differs depending on the set value. You may do so. Specifically, when the set value is a high setting of 4 to 6, the execution rate may be higher than when the set value is a low setting of 1 to 3. On the contrary, the execution rate may be higher in the low setting than in the case of the high setting.

Returning to FIG. 9-2, after executing the process of step 063AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect, that is, whether or not there is execution (step 063AKS022). When there is execution (step 063AKS022; Yes), the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to the set value according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-4 (step 063AKS023). In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, there are two types of execution modes of "aspect 1" and "aspect 2" as execution modes of the setting suggestion effect, and as shown in FIG. 9-4, "aspect 1" is set. The higher the set value, the higher the rate of determination. On the other hand, in "Aspect 2", the lower the set value is set, the higher the rate of determination is. Here, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a "big hit" (higher ball output rate). Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is performed, , It is suggested that the ball output rate is set to a high set value (advantageous set value) (advantageous suggestion is made). The setting suggestion effects of "Aspect 1" and "Aspect 2" in the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment are both effects of displaying characters, but different characters are displayed in "Aspect 1" and "Aspect 2". Display (Aspect 1 is a character of character A, aspect 2 is a character of character B, etc.). The setting suggestion effect is not limited to the effect of displaying a character, and may be arbitrary as long as it is different between "aspect 1" and "aspect 2", such as an effect of displaying a message, a battle effect, and a dialogue effect. By determining the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect in step 063AKS023, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is also determined. In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is longer in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" than in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2". There is. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is advantageous is performed, and it is possible to secure the shooting time. In addition, since the shooting time can be secured, the shot images and videos will be published by the player on the Internet. In many cases, the images taken by which pachinko machine 1 in which game field are also included. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the game hall, the player advertises the game hall. Therefore, by securing the shooting time when the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is advantageous is performed, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the playground side.

In addition, although the example shown in FIG. 9-4 shows that there are two types of execution modes, in addition to this, for example, when the set value is a low setting of 1 to 3, it is not executed and the set value is 4. There may be an execution mode of "Aspect 3" that is executed only when the high setting of ~ 6. Further, there may be an execution mode of "Aspect 4" that is executed only when the set value of 6 is the highest set value. In this case, when the set value of 6 is set. It is sufficient that the determination ratio of the "aspect 4" is lower than the ratio of the setting suggestion effect other than the "aspect 4" being executed. According to this, since the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 4" is increased, the player is given a recognition that the set value is not 6 when the setting suggestion effect other than "Aspect 4" is executed. It is possible to prevent the game from being stolen, and it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed. Further, there may be a mode in which the setting value is an even number or a mode in which the setting value is an odd number.

Returning to FIG. 9-2, after executing the process of step 063AKS023, the effect control CPU 120 sets the preparatory effect for setting the execution of the preparatory effect (step 063AKS024). In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the ending effect, a predetermined period (see FIG. 9-8) regardless of whether the execution mode is “aspect 1” or “aspect 2”. During the period of T1 shown), an effect of urging the player to prepare for shooting is executed as a preparation effect. In addition to prompting the player to prepare the camera as a preparation for shooting, the preparatory effect is also an effect that suggests the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect to the player (see FIG. 9-9).

After executing the process of step 063AKS024 of FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the mode determined in step 063AKS023 is "mode 1" (step 063AKS025). In the case of "Aspect 1" (step 063AKS063; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets a special effect for setting the execution of the special effect (step 063AKS026). In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is executed, a special effect that is not executed by the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2" is further executed. That is, the special effect is an effect performed during the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1". Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (D), the special effect in the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment displays an effect image around the character displayed as the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1". It is a production. Not limited to this, for example, a special sound may be output. In this case, the special sound to be output may be the same sound as the sound output when the jackpot game state is controlled. According to this, it is suggested that it is advantageous, and the player can easily grasp the advantage.

After executing the process of step 063AKS026 in FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 sets the extended operation display for setting the execution of the display effect operation display (step 063AKS027). In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is executed, the player performs the operation, so that the ending effect is finished (after the jackpot game state is finished). It is possible to recognize that the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" has been performed (extended display is possible). Therefore, in step 063AKS027, a display prompting an operation for making it visible that the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" has been performed even after the end of the ending effect is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (E), a display prompting an operation (extension operation) for the push button 31B is set. When the extension operation is performed, the feature unit 063AK displays the character image displayed as the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" as the background image for a period until the variable display is performed 15 times (FIG. FIG. See 9-9 (I)). According to this, it is possible to take a picture again for the player who could not take the image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 during the ending effect, and also for the other players. It is possible to appeal that the setting suggestion effect of 1 has been executed.

After executing the process of step 063AKS027 in FIG. 9-2, when it is determined in step 063AKS025 that it is "Aspect 2" (step 063AKS025; No), or when it is determined that it is not executed in step 063AKS022 (step 063AKS022: No), the effect control CPU 120 is set to perform the return prevention notification and the warning display (step 063AKS028). As the return prevention notification set in step 063AKS028, a prepaid card or the like as a game recording medium in which balance information or the like is recorded as information that can specify the magnitude of the game value of a game ball or the like that can be used for the game. There is a return prevention display as a display to prevent forgetting to remove the card. In the return prevention display, for example, an image showing the ejection of the card is displayed with the characters "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card." It should be noted that, instead of a card, a coin or the like as a game recording medium in which balance information or the like is recorded as information that can specify the magnitude of the game value such as a game ball that can be used for the game is targeted. You may perform an alert. The prepaid card or the like as the recording medium for the game is for enabling the game to be executed by inserting the card or the like. In addition, as a warning display, there is a immersive prevention display as a display for preventing the player from being too enthusiastic about the game of the pachinko game machine 1 or the slot machine. In the immersive prevention display, for example, the characters "Pachinko is a play that you can enjoy moderately. Be careful of immersiveness." And the image that surrounds the characters are displayed. The immersive prevention display as such a warning display suppresses or warns the player from being absorbed in the game, and suppresses or warns the player from spending a large amount of money on the game. In addition, as a warning display, a warning display prohibiting games under the age of 18 such as "Games under the age of 18 are prohibited by law" and a fraudulent act such as "Fraud is a crime." A warning display, a warning display for suppressing fraudulent acts such as "Please be careful about fraud disguised as a strategy", etc. may be displayed by characters and images. The other warning indications may be other than those shown above. For example, when a movable accessory is provided on the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movement of the movable accessory may be displayed. Therefore, care may be taken not to get injured.

In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is longer in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" than in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2". There is. In addition, the execution period of the ending effect is the same regardless of the jackpot type. Therefore, in step 063AKS028, the execution period of the return prevention notification and the warning display is longer when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2" is executed than when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is executed. (T3 <T6 in FIG. 9-8), and the start timing of the next mode notification described later is set to the same timing.

After executing the process of step 063AKS028 of FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next mode notification to notify the game state after the end of the big hit as the next mode notification (step 063AKS029), and the ending effect. Start Ends the setting process. In the process of step 063AKS029, the period for performing the next mode notification is also set. In step 063AKS029, the period of T4 shown in FIG. 9-8 is set as the next mode notification period. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the period of T7 may also be set as shown in FIG. 9-8 (C).

Returning to FIG. 9-1, when it is determined that the ending effect in-progress flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed (step). 063AKS005). When it is determined that the ending effect time has elapsed, that is, when the execution period of the ending effect has ended (step 063AKS005; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the ending effect in progress flag to the off state (step 063AKS012). Then, as the probability variation fluctuation number, the number of variable displays controlled to the probability variation state after the end of the big hit game state is set (step 063AKS013). In step 063AKS013, for example, 100 is set. Note that the process of step 063AKS013 may not be executed, and a command corresponding to the number of probable variation fluctuations may be received from the main board 11 side. After executing the process of step 063AKS013, the effect control CPU 120 clears the effect process flag, initializes the value to "0" (step 063AKS014), and then ends the ending effect process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 063AKS005 that the ending effect time has not elapsed (step 063AKS005; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, that is, whether or not there is a setting suggestion effect. Determine (step 063AKS006). When there is a setting suggestion effect (step 063AKS006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect operation control process when there is a setting suggestion effect (step 063AKS007), and shifts to the process of step 063AKS008. On the other hand, when there is no setting suggestion effect (step 063AKS006; No), the process proceeds to step 063AKS008 without executing the process of step 063AKS007.

FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect operation control process with the setting suggestion effect performed in step 063AKS007 of FIG. 9-1. In the ending effect operation control process with the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 9-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the preparatory effect period (step 063AKS031). The preparation effect period is set by the process of step 063AKS024 in FIG. 9-2. In the case of the preparatory effect period (step 063AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the preparatory effect operation control for executing the preparatory effect (step 063AKS032).

After executing the process of step 063AKS032, or when it is not the preparation effect period (step 063AKS031; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 063AKS033). The setting suggestion effect period is set according to the mode in accordance with the execution mode determined in step 063AKS023 of FIG. 9-2. If it is not the setting suggestion effect period (step 063AKS033; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the ending effect operation control process when there is a setting suggestion effect.

In the case of the setting suggestion effect period (step 063AKS033; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting suggestion effect operation control for executing the setting suggestion effect of the mode determined in step 063AKS023 of FIG. 9-2 (step). 063AKS034). It is determined whether or not the mode of the setting suggestion effect subsequently executed is "Aspect 1" (step 063AKS035), and if it is "Aspect 1" (Step 063AKS035; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a special effect period. Determine (step 063AKS036). The special effect period may be set in step 063AKS026 of FIG. 9-2. The special effect period in the feature unit 063AK in this embodiment is the same period as the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1". Therefore, if the special effect period is in the same period as the set suggestion effect period, the process of step 063AKS030 is unnecessary. On the other hand, the special effect period may be shorter than the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1". In this case, it may be determined by the process of step 063AKS030 whether or not it is the special effect period.

If it is the special effect period (step 063AKS036; Yes), the special effect operation control for executing the special effect is performed (step 063AKS037). After executing the process of step 063AKS037, or when it is not the special effect period (step 063AKS036; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the extended operation display period (step 063AKS038). The extended operation display period is set in step 063AKS027 of FIG. 9-2. If it is the extended operation display period (step 063AKS038; Yes), the extended operation display control for performing the extended operation display is performed (step 063AKS038A). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation by the player is detected by the push sensor 35B (step 063AKS039), and if it is detected (step 063AKS039; Yes), the extension flag is set to the on state. After that (step 063AKS040), the ending effect operation control process is terminated when there is a setting suggestion effect. The extension flag is a flag indicating that the extension operation has been performed by the player, and is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

When it is determined in step 063AKS035 that the execution mode is "Aspect 2" (step 036AKS035; No), when it is determined in step 063AKS038 that it is not the extended operation display period (step 063AKS030; No), or in step 063AKS039. If no operation is detected (step 063AKS039; No), the ending effect operation control process with the setting suggestion effect ends.

Returning to FIG. 9-1, after executing the process of step 063AKS00, or when it is determined in step 063AKS006 that there is no setting suggestion effect (step 063AKS006; No), the effect control CPU 120 is in the return prevention notification and alert period. It is determined whether or not there is (step 063AKS008). The return prevention notification and alert period are set in step 063AKS028 of FIG. 9-2. In addition, in the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, the return prevention notification and the warning are given regardless of whether the setting suggestion effect is performed or not performed in the ending effect. The same applies to the next mode notification.

When it is determined in step 063AKS008 of FIG. 9-1 that it is the return prevention notification and alert period (step 063AKS008; Yes), the return prevention notification and alert control are performed to execute the return prevention notification and alert (step 063AKS008; Yes). Step 063AKS009). After the processing of step 063AKS009, or when it is determined in step 063AKS008 that it is not the return prevention notification and attention alert period (step 063AKS008; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the next mode notification period. (Step 063AKS010). The next mode notification period is set in step 063AKS029 shown in FIG. 9-2. In the case of the next mode notification period (step 063AKS010; Yes), the ending effect processing ends after the next mode notification control for performing the next mode notification is performed (step 063AKS011). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the next mode notification period (step 063AKS010; No), the ending effect processing is terminated as it is. In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, as described above, once a big hit occurs, 100% probability variation control is performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. For example, the probability variation jackpot is shown. Only when the jackpot game state ends, it is controlled to the probabilistic state, and when it becomes a non-probable jackpot, it is controlled to the time saving state instead of the probabilistic state after the jackpot game state ends. In the mode notification, the notification corresponding to each of the probability change and the time reduction may be performed.

FIG. 9-6 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the variable display start setting process performed in the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. 7. In the process in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9-6, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the extension flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS041). When the extension flag is on (step 063AKS041; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 uses the character displayed in the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" as a special background as a background image (special background) for 15 fluctuations. 15 variable special background setting is performed (step 063AKS042). Specifically, in the process of step 063AKS042, the value of the special background counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is set to "1" (the initial value is "0"), and the special background is displayed in the variable display. Do. As a result, the special background is displayed from the variable display.

After executing the process of step 063AKS042, the effect control CPU 120 clears the extension flag (step 063AKS043). Then, the remaining number of times display setting for displaying the remaining number of times of variable display in which the special background is displayed is set (step 063AKS044). Specifically, in the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, the character displayed in the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" as a special background from the end of the jackpot game state to the end of the variable display 15 times. Is displayed as a background image. Therefore, in step 063AKS044, 15 scales are displayed, and the player can visually display that the special background is displayed until the remaining 15 variable displays are completed. It should be noted that the display may not be a scale display but may be a numerical countdown display. Further, in this example, the remaining number display is updated (reducing the scale) at the end timing of the variable display (the remaining number display is updated by the special figure hit waiting process described later), but the variable display is displayed. The remaining number display may be updated at the same time as the start, and in that case, the remaining number display may be updated by the process in the variable display start setting process.

After executing the process of step 063AKS044, the effect control CPU 120 sets the special background display flag indicating that the special background is being displayed to the ON state (step 063AKS045), and processes in the variable display start setting process. To finish. The special background display flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 063AKS041 that the extension flag is in the off state (step 063AKS041; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special background display flag is set to the on state (step). 063AKS046). If the special background display flag is on (step 063AKS046; Yes), the value of the special background counter is added by 1 (step 063AKS047), and then the process in the variable display start setting process ends. On the other hand, if the special background display flag is off (step 063AKS046; No), the variable display is started after the normal background display setting for displaying the normal background instead of the special background is made (step 063AKS048). End the process in the setting process. After the normal background display setting is once performed, the processing in the variable display start setting processing may not be performed until the jackpot game state is controlled again.

FIG. 9-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing in the special figure hit waiting process performed in the special figure hit waiting process executed in step S173 of FIG. 7. In the processing in the waiting process for the special figure, a process of determining whether or not the variable display has been performed 15 times and a process of updating the remaining number of times display are mainly performed. In the process in the special figure hit waiting process shown in FIG. 9-6, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special background display in-progress flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS051). When the special background display in-progress flag is in the off state (step 063AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process in the special figure hit wait process as it is.

On the other hand, when the special background display in-flag is on (step 063AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 updates the remaining number of times display (step 063AKS052). Specifically, in step 063AKS052, the remaining number of times display is updated by turning on the scale corresponding to the remaining number of times among the 15 scale displays and turning off the finished variable display. That is, if it is the first variable display after the end of the big hit, the control is performed to turn off the 15th scale display (the remaining 14 scales are turned on). After executing the process of step 063AKS052, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the special background counter is 15, that is, whether or not it is the final variable display for displaying the special background (step 063AKS053). .. If the value of the special background counter is not 15 (step 063AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process in the special figure hit wait process.

When the value of the special background counter is 15 (step 063AKS053; Yes), it is assumed that the final variable display for displaying the special background is completed, the special background display flag is cleared (step 063AKS054), and the value of the special background counter is set. Is cleared to 0 (step 063AKS055), and then the special figure hit waiting process is terminated. As a result, No is determined in step 063AKS046 of FIG. 9-6, and the normal background is displayed in step 063AKS048.

FIG. 9-8 is a time chart showing an execution period of the ending effect and the like. Specifically, FIG. 9-8 (A) is a time chart when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed in the ending effect, and FIG. 9-8 (B) is a time chart of aspect 2 in the ending effect. It is a time chart when the setting suggestion effect is executed, and FIG. 9-8 (C) is a time chart when the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the ending effect.

As described above, the execution period of the ending effect is the same regardless of the jackpot type. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the execution period of the ending effect is a common period regardless of whether the setting suggestion effect is executed or not.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the jackpot symbol is stopped and the round game is performed regardless of whether the setting suggestion effect is executed or not. Then, when the ending effect is started, when the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed and the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 (A) and 9-8 (B). In addition to urging the player to prepare the camera as a preparation for shooting, a preparatory effect that suggests the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect to the player is executed during the period of T1. On the other hand, when the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the next mode notification is executed for the period of T7 as shown in FIG. 9-8 (C).

Subsequently, when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed, and when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed, the setting suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 9-8 (A) and 9-8 (B). Execute. In the case of the first aspect, the period setting suggestion effect of T2 is executed, and the special effect is also executed accordingly. In addition, the extension operation display is performed during the period within the period of T2 in which the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), an extension operation display is performed from a predetermined period after the setting suggestion effect is executed to the timing at the end of the setting suggestion effect, but within the period of T2. If there is, it may be any period.

Further, in the case of the second aspect, the period setting suggestion effect of T5 is executed. Specifically, the character of aspect 2 is displayed. In the feature unit 063AK, T2> T5. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-8, the end timing of the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) coincides with the end timing of the next mode notification shown in FIG. 9-8 (C). An example is shown, but these timings do not have to match.

Subsequently, when the setting suggestion effect is completed, when the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), the return prevention notification and the warning display are performed during the period of T3, and the setting suggestion effect is displayed. When the setting suggestion effect of is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), the return prevention notification and the warning display are performed during the period of T6. In the feature unit 063AK, T6> T3. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 063AK, T2 + T3 = T5 + T6, that is, the difference (T2-T5) between the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 and the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is aspect 2. Each period matches the difference (T6-T3) between the period of the return prevention notification, etc. when the setting suggestion effect of is executed and the period of the return prevention notification, etc. when the setting suggestion effect of mode 1 is executed. It has been set. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (C), the return prevention notification and the warning display are executed for the same period as when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed. To do. If the setting suggestion effect is not executed, after the next mode notification is executed for the period of T7, the same notification (display) is performed for the same period as when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed.

After the return prevention notification and the warning display are performed, in either case, the next mode notification is performed for the period of T4, and the ending effect is ended. After the end of the ending effect, that is, after the end of the big hit game state, the probability change state is controlled. However, if the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, the extension operation is performed, and the extension flag is on, FIG. As shown in -8 (A), the special background is displayed for 15 fluctuations. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, the relationship between the execution periods is T4 <T3 <T1 <T6 <T5 <T2 <T7, but the relationship is not limited to this, and T4 <T3 = T1 <T6. The relationship may be <T5 <T2 <T7, and as long as the relationship T1 <T5 <T2 is established, the other periods may be arbitrary. That is, in this example, the difference between T2 and T5 is adjusted by T3 and T6, but T4 may be included in the adjustment, and the period of T4 is set to the period of T4 instead of T3 and T6 in aspects 1 and 2. The difference between T2 and T5 may be adjusted depending on the difference between.

FIG. 9-9 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an ending effect or the like is executed. Specifically, an example of an effect operation when the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed in the ending effect is shown. Further, in the illustrated example, an extension operation is performed and a special background is displayed after the end of the jackpot game state. First, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the jackpot symbol is stopped, a round game is subsequently performed. Then, with the start of the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), a camera image is displayed to prompt the player to prepare for shooting as a preparatory effect, and when is the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect? , A countdown display is performed as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (B) and 9-9 (C). In addition, this preparatory effect suggests to the player that the character should be paid attention to by displaying a message such as "Attention to the character after ○ seconds" instead of simply performing the countdown display. It is also a production. That is, the preparatory effect is also an effect that includes an explanation of the content of the setting suggestion effect. In the illustrated example, only the message "Attention to the character" is given, but the content of the setting suggestion effect may be explained in more detail, for example, "whether the character A appears or not".

Then, when the preparatory effect is completed, the setting suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (D). Since it is the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect, a special effect of displaying an effect that makes the surroundings of the displayed character A stand out is also executed. Further, as shown in the figure, the feature unit 063AK visually displays the display time of the character A of the character A corresponding to the aspect 1 to the player when the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 is executed. In the illustrated example, the display period is visible on the meter display, but a countdown display may be used. The control of the display time of the character may be executed in step 063AKS034 when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed, or when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed in step 063AKS007. In addition, a process for controlling the display period may be added separately.

Subsequently, in the extended operation display period, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (E), the image of the push button 31B is displayed as the extended operation display. In the feature unit 063AK, the extension operation display is performed in such a manner that it can be recognized that the extension is performed by performing the operation. Therefore, it is easy for the player to understand what happens when the operation is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Then, when the player's operation on the push button 31B is detected, the display is extended as shown in FIG. 9-9 (F) as the extension flag is turned on, that is, special after the end of the jackpot game state. Visibly display that the background is displayed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-9 (F), another example of displaying a message such as "Special time has entered!", That is, an example of performing the next mode notification is shown, but this is an example, and the next time. Mode notification does not have to be performed. The next mode notification may be executed in other periods in addition to the execution period of T4 shown in FIG. 9-8, and may be executed, for example, within the execution period of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 9-9 (F) shows an example in that case. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-9 (F), unlike FIGS. 9-9 (D) and 9-9 (E), the character of character A is in a pose with a V sign. , The pose may be the same as in FIG. 9-9 (D) and FIG. 9-9 (E). For example, as shown in the figure, when the pose of the character changes with the passage of time, the pose character at the timing when the push button 31B is operated may be displayed as a special background after the jackpot game state ends. In the example shown in FIG. 9-9, the push button 31B is operated in the manner shown in FIG. 9-9 (F), and the character image of the pose is displayed as a special background. Apart from this, even if the pose of the character changes with the passage of time, the character image of the pose displayed at the start of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a special background regardless of the operation timing.

During the return prevention notification and warning display period, as shown in Fig. 9-9 (G), the return prevention notification includes the message "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card." To prevent forgetting to remove the card. Is displayed, and the message "Pachinko is a play that you can enjoy moderately! Be careful of your immersiveness." Is displayed as a warning display. Then, in the next mode notification period, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (H), the message "Special time has entered!" Is displayed, and then the ending effect ends, so that the jackpot game state ends. In addition to the next mode notification, for example, the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be displayed. Further, in the illustrated example, a character image of the character A displayed as the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is displayed in accordance with the return prevention notification and the warning display. When the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed, the character image of the character B may be displayed together, and when the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the character image may not be displayed. In addition, unlike this, a common character image may be displayed together with the return prevention notification and the warning display regardless of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed.

After the jackpot game state ends, it is controlled to the probability change state. Then, since the extension operation is performed by the player, the special background is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (I) until the variable display of 15 times is completed. Although the effect image as a special effect is not displayed and only the character image is displayed, the effect image may also be displayed. Further, in the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (I), 15 memory displays are performed as the remaining number display, and the memory display is turned off one by one each time the variable display ends. ing. In the illustrated example, an example of a state in which the third variable display is performed after the end of the big hit game state is shown.

In addition, in the feature unit 063AK in this embodiment, when the operation is performed by the player, the special background is displayed in the variable display of a predetermined time (15 times) after the end of the big hit game state, and corresponds to the mode 1. Although an example of extending the character display to be performed is shown, the special background may be displayed in the variable display of a predetermined time (15 times) regardless of the operation of the player. According to this, the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, that is, the display suggesting that the ball output rate is set to a high set value (advantageous set value) is displayed for a long period of time. It is possible to appeal to the player of the pachinko machine 1 and give a sense of superiority to the player of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to this, when the operation is performed by the player, the special background may be displayed (+15 times) in the variable display 30 times instead of the variable display 15 times. Further, for example, the later the operation timing by the player, the greater the number of variable displays in which the special background is displayed. The variable display in which the special background is displayed depending on the timing of the operation during the extended operation display period. The number of times may be different. This can attract the player's interest in displaying the special background for a longer period of time. Further, for example, when the operation is performed according to a plurality of specific timings existing during the extended operation display period, the variable display number of times the special background is displayed may be increased. Further, for example, among a plurality of specific timings, +10 times when the operation is performed at the first specific timing, and +10 times when the operation is performed at the second specific timing, etc., depending on the number of operations according to the plurality of specific timings. The variable number of times the special background is displayed may be increased. Further, the variable display number of times that the special background is displayed may be reduced (for example, -1 time) by an operation other than the specific timing. According to this, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate at a specific timing.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK of the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 having a high ratio determined when the setting value is high and the setting value are set to a low setting value. Of the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 having a high ratio determined in the case, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed for a longer period than the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 (from T5). But T2 is longer). According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 suggesting that the setting value is advantageous is performed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, the setting suggestion effect is executed in the ending effect, and different characters are displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 suggesting that the setting value is advantageous is performed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the execution period of the ending effect in the feature unit 063AK is a common execution period regardless of whether the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed or the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed. Is. According to this, it is not necessary to change the execution period of the ending effect depending on the mode of the setting suggestion effect, and the control load on the main board 11 side can be reduced.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), by extending the period of the return prevention notification and the warning display, the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed and the setting of the second aspect is performed. The difference in the execution period when the suggestion effect is executed is adjusted. By extending the execution period of the return prevention notification, it is possible to prevent forgetting to take the prepaid card or the like as a recording medium for games. In addition, as a warning display, the period of the immersive prevention display is extended, so that the immersiveness in the game can be reduced.

In the feature unit 063AK, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the lapse of a specific period, which is the execution period of the preparation effect, after the ending effect is started. Since the setting suggestion effect is executed after the period as the preparatory effect elapses, it is possible to make it easier to pay attention to the mode of the setting suggestion effect rather than executing the setting suggestion effect at the start of the ending effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the period of the preparatory effect in the feature unit 063AK is shorter than the execution period of the setting suggestion effect (T1 <T5 <T2). Therefore, after the lapse of a specific period, which is the execution period of the preparatory effect, the setting suggestion effect for a period longer than the specific period is executed. According to this, it is possible to easily grasp the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, the feature unit 063AK performs an extension operation display, and when an operation is performed by the player within the extension operation display period, a special background is used in the 15 variable displays executed after the end of the jackpot game state. The image of the character corresponding to the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is displayed. According to this, it can be grasped that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed even after the end of the big hit game state.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, the special effect is also executed. The special effect is an effect of displaying an effect image around the character corresponding to the first aspect, and is an effect that is not executed when the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect. Further, the feature unit 063AK may output a special sound which is the same sound as the sound output when the jackpot game state is controlled, as a special effect. According to this, the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect 1 may be output. It can be easily grasped.

(Modification example of feature part 063AK)
In the feature unit 063AK of the above-described embodiment, the modes 1 and 2 are prepared as the mode of the setting suggestion effect, and the mode 1 is determined in a high ratio when it is set to an advantageous setting value. Although a certain example has been shown, for example, the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 may be a setting suggestion effect of an aspect in which it is confirmed that the setting value is set to an advantageous value. The advantageous set value means a set value having a high ball ejection rate as described above, and a set value in which the base value obtained by multiplying the number of so-called safe balls by the number of launching balls by 100 is 100 or more. (For example, set value 4 or more). According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect in which the advantageous setting value is determined, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above embodiment, an example of displaying the image of the push button 31B as the extension operation display is shown (see FIG. 9-9 (E)), but in addition to this, the operation by the player is effective. The operation validity period that can be accepted by the player may be displayed so that the player can see it. In this case, the operation validity period may be, for example, a meter display or a countdown display. Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the return prevention notification and the warning display are simultaneously performed is shown, but the return prevention notification and the warning display are alternately and repeatedly displayed, or T4 in FIG. 9-8. Of the period, the first half may be a return prevention notification and the second half may be a warning display.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above-described embodiment, the period of the return prevention notification and the warning display is different depending on whether the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is performed or the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is performed. An example of adjusting the execution period of the ending effect itself (T3 and T6 in FIG. 9-8) is shown, but in addition to this, the adjustment is made including the period of the next mode notification (T4 in FIG. 9-8). You may try to do it. Of the period of the return prevention notification and the warning display, one of them may be T6 and the other period may be T3.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above embodiment, the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed by displaying the special background (extending display) in the 15 times variable display performed after the end of the big hit game state. An example has been shown in which the player can visually recognize the fact and the player who could not take the image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect during the ending effect can take the image again. Is an example. If the player can recognize that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect has been performed after the end of the jackpot game state (capable of shooting as an image or a moving image), the extended display aspect is not limited to the special background, for example. , The hold display is set to the aspect of the character of the aspect 1, a special advance notice effect corresponding to the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 is executed, and the decorative pattern is different from the normal time, and the character of the aspect 1 is executed. May be added. In addition, it may be possible to select which of these modes is used depending on the operation timing of the player. According to this, since the extended display can be performed in the mode desired by the player, the game entertainment can be improved. Further, regardless of the operation timing of the player, it may be possible to select in which mode the extended display is performed, or it may be determined by lottery. Further, even when the operation is performed by the player, it may be possible to select again whether or not to perform the extended display by, for example, operating the cross key or the stick controller 31A.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the setting suggestion effect of the first and second aspects is executed during the ending effect is shown, which is an example. If the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is longer than that of the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is arbitrary, and may be, for example, during a specific round game. It may be during variable display such as during reach production. If it is executed during the round game, it may be set in step S176 of FIG. 7, and if it is executed during the variable display, it may be set in the process of step S171 of FIG. 7 and executed in the process of step S172. ..

(Explanation of feature 85AK)
Next, the feature portion 085AK of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 085AK of the present embodiment, as a look-ahead notice effect, as a predetermined light emitting means from a variable display executed before the variable display of the look-ahead target to the variable display of the look-ahead target. By making the predetermined lamp of No. 1 emit light, a lamp effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is performed. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 085AK, when the lamp effect is being executed, whether or not the predetermined lamp is emitting light in the variable display executed before the variable display of the look-ahead target. In addition to performing a process of causing the predetermined lamp to emit light, the variable display of the look-ahead target also has a feature of performing a process of causing the predetermined lamp to emit light regardless of whether or not the predetermined lamp is emitting light. As a result, even if there is a problem that the lamp that should emit light is not emitted in the lamp effect, the light emission process is performed for the predetermined lamp to be emitted in each variable display, so that the problem of the lamp effect is minimized. It is limited to the limit and prevents the deterioration of the game entertainment. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 085AK having such features will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is an enlarged view of the image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 085AK. As shown in the figure, a movable accessory 85AK001 is provided in the lower center of the image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 085AK, and inside the accessory 80AK001, the left side together with the liquid crystal display device is provided. Three predetermined lamps are provided, such as a predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1), a central predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2), and a predetermined lamp 85AK004 (lamp 3) on the right side. As shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device is divided into three so as to correspond to each predetermined lamp. Although the illustrated example shows an example in which the liquid crystal display device is provided in the movable accessory 85AK001, it may be a fixed sub-liquid crystal display device instead of the accessory. The predetermined lamp may be provided in the sub liquid crystal display device.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. When the start winning prize determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on (). Step S201). When it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes) because it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 sets the first special drawing. It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved stored number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 is the first stored value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the first special figure reserved storage number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved storage number count value. When it is determined in step S202 that the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is not the upper limit value (step S202; No), the CPU 103 stores the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting unit, etc.). The starting port buffer value, which is a value, is set to "1" (step S203).

When it is determined in step S201 that the first start port switch 22A is off (step S201; No), or when it is determined in step S202 that the number of reserved first special figure has reached the upper limit value (step S202; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S204). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is on in the switch processing, for example, the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on (step S204; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the second special figure. It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved memory number, which is the reserved stored number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 is a second stored value of a second special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the second special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the second special figure reserved storage number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved storage number count value. When it is determined in step S205 that the number of reserved second special figure is not the upper limit value (step S205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to "2" (step S206). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S204; No), or when it is determined that the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (step S205; Yes), the CPU 103 determines. Start The winning prize determination process ends.

After executing either the process of step S203 or S206, the CPU 103 updates so as to add 1 to the special figure reserved storage count value according to the start port buffer value (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the 1st special figure hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the 2nd special figure hold memory count value is added. Add 1 In this way, the 1st special figure reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the 1st start winning opening and the 1st start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the 1st special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). In addition, the second special figure reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.), is updated so as to be added by 1 (step S208).

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number for determining the special figure display result is determined from the numerical data updated by the random number counter or the like provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit. At this time, when the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 can control the first hold indicator 25A to specify the number of the first special figure hold storage added by one. The display may be performed by the first hold indicator 25A (for example, the number of LEDs lit by one is increased). When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display a display capable of specifying the number of the second special figure hold storage added by one. The second hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, increase the number of LEDs lit by one).

The first special figure holding storage unit is a special figure game (first special figure game) in which the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning is generated, but the game has not been started yet. The hold data of the special figure game) using the first special figure in the symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the first starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 are stored as pending data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes stored information.

It should be noted that the hold number of the first special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first hold display unit 5HL. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first hold display unit 5HL. To do.

The second special figure holding storage unit is a special figure game (second) that has not been started yet, although the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning is generated. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the second special figure in the special symbol display device 4B is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are set as pending data, and the numbers are Storage is performed until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes stored information.

The hold number of the second special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the second hold display unit 5HR. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second hold display unit 5HR. To do.

After executing the process of step S210, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the start port winning designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S211). After that, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step S213). As described above, the winning random number value determination process is a process for determining the starting winning value, and the random number value is based on the random number values MR1 and MR3 of the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S209. This is a process for determining whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target is a “big hit” or a “small hit” and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 10-5). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (). Step S215), the start winning determination process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0". (Step S216), the process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S213 of FIG. 10-2 as the winning random number value determination process. In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as "big hit" or "small hit" by the special symbol normal processing, and the big hit game. A decision is made as to whether or not to control the state or the small hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random number value determination process, the game ball is extracted at the starting winning timing detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) at this timing. Judgment as to whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the randomized value (random value extracted in the process of step S209) is "big hit" or "small hit", and variable display of the decorative symbol. It determines which fluctuation pattern will be (so-called "look-ahead"). As a result, the special symbol display result becomes "big hit" before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started (before the start condition of the special symbol game is satisfied). It is pre-read that it will be a "small hit" and that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be the predetermined display mode, and based on this pre-reading result, the effect control board 12 will hold the display by the effect control CPU 120 or the like. The display mode and the like can be determined.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 first, for example, a time saving flag (a flag that turns on when the time saving state is set) provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. ) And the state of the probability change flag (the flag that is turned on when the probability change state is reached) to specify the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S301). The CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state by checking the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag control unit, etc.). To identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", it may be specified that the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state.

Following the process of step S301, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the specified gaming state is in the jackpot gaming state (step S302). When it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (step S302; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not the high base is in the high open control accompanying the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S303). ). When it is determined that the base is high (step S303; Yes), or when it is determined that the jackpot is in the process of step S302 (step S402; Yes), the CPU 103 has a start port buffer value of "2". It is determined whether or not there is (step S304). When it is determined that the start port buffer value is not "2" (step S304; No), the CPU 103 makes a setting for limiting the determination at the time of winning (step S306).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S304; Yes), or when it is determined that the high base is not in the process of step S303 (step S303; No), the CPU 103 is the first. The special figure display result is determined from the 1 special figure display result determination table or the 2nd special figure display result determination table according to the start port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current gaming state. A table for determining the figure display result is selected (step S305).

Following the process of step S305, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307). The CPU 103 compares, for example, the individual determination values included in the jackpot determination range with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 10-2 one by one. It may be determined whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, if it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit" (big hit start determination). it can.

In the process of step S307, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S210, and perform the above determination using the read random number value MR1. Further, the CPU 103 holds the random number value MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special figure reservation storage unit) or a storage area of the CPU 103 separately from the step S210, and makes the above determination based on the held random number value. May be done. This also applies to the random number value MR3 described later. As described above, the random number value used in the winning random number value determination process does not have to be the random number value stored in the special figure holding storage unit.

When it is determined in the process of step S307 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S308). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the jackpot type determination table. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data.

Following the process of step S308, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 10-6), which will be described later, prepared in advance by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, and sets it in the use table (step S309). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result becomes a “big hit”, and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-6, the determination ratio is described instead of the range of determination values. In the actual table, it is sufficient that the determination values in the range corresponding to the determination ratio of FIG. 10-6 are assigned to each fluctuation pattern. The determination ratio is a ratio in which the entire range (1 to 900) of the values that the random number value MR3 can take is set to 100. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), when the jackpot type is probabilistic / non-probable, the determination rate of the variation pattern PB1-1 is 5, the determination rate of the variation pattern PB1-2 is 25, and the variation pattern. Since the determination ratio of PB1-3 is 70, the variation pattern PB1-1 is assigned a determination value 1 to 45 (range of 5%) to be compared with the random number value MR3, and the variation pattern PB1-2 is assigned a random number value. A decision value of 46 to 270 (range of 25%) to be compared with MR3 is assigned, and a decision value of 271 to 900 (range of 70%) to be compared with the random value MR3 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PB1-3. The allocation of such a decision value is the same for other tables in which the decision ratio is described.

When it is determined in the process of step S307 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S307; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step). S310). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S305. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range.

When it is determined that the small hit is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Is selected and set in the usage table (step S312). The small hit fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is "small hit", and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), the loss fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (FIGS. 10-6 (C), (See (D)) is selected and set in the usage table (step S311). Specifically, when the current gaming state specified in step S301 is a non-time saving state (low base state) (when the time saving flag is off), the loss fluctuation pattern of FIG. 10-6 (C) is determined. When the table is set as the table to be used and the current gaming state specified in step S301 is the time saving state (high base state) (when the time saving flag is on), the loss variation in FIG. 10-6 (D) Set the pattern determination table to the used table. The loss variation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the variable display in which the variable display result becomes "loss", and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each variation pattern.

After executing any of steps S309, S311, and S312, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot fluctuation pattern set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted in step S209. The variation pattern assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR3 is determined by referring to any one of the table, the small hit variation pattern determination table, and the loss variation pattern determination table (step S313). The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern by, for example, comparing the individual determination values assigned to each variation pattern with the random number value MR3 one by one to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR3. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR3 and the minimum value of the determination value. Or the fluctuation pattern may be determined by comparing with the maximum value.

After executing any of the processes of steps S306 and S313, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the start winning command according to the determination result of step S308 or step S313 (step S314), and determines the random value at the time of winning. To finish. The start winning command is composed of a starting opening winning designation command, a special figure hold storage number designation command, a symbol judgment result designation command, and a variation pattern judgment result designation command. When the start opening buffer value is "1", the first start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are used as start winning commands. Set the command and send. When the start opening buffer value is "2", the second start winning opening designation command, the second special figure hold storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are used as start winning commands. Set the command and send. The command set for transmission is transmitted in the command control process.

The 1st special figure reserved storage number specification command and the 2nd special figure reserved storage number specification command to be set for transmission are commands for specifying the current 1st special figure reserved storage number and the 2nd special figure reserved storage number (to the stored number). The command including the corresponding EXT data) may be specified, and the number of special figure reserved storage to be specified may be specified by the count value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter or the second special figure reserved storage number counter. When the determination result in step S307 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the symbol specification command to be set for transmission is a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "big hit" (to "big hit"). A command that includes the corresponding EXT data), and when the determination result in step S307 is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "small hit" ("" A command that includes EXT data corresponding to "small hit"), and when the judgment result in step S310 is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), a command that specifies that the judgment result of the variable display result is "missing". (A command including EXT data corresponding to "loss"), and when the judgment result in step S303 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), the judgment at the time of starting winning is not performed "No judgment". It may be a command that specifies that (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). The variation pattern determination result specification command to be set for transmission is a command for specifying the variation pattern that is the determination result when the variation pattern is determined in step S313 (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to the variation pattern that is the determination result). When the determination result in step S304 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), the command (EXT corresponding to "no determination") that specifies that the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed is "no determination". It can be a command that includes data).

In the winning random number value determination process, as described above, regarding the variable display corresponding to the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special figure game) is "big hit" or "small". Whether or not it becomes a "hit" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 10-6) are determined, and so-called look-ahead is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state, and the determination is not made based on the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed. Therefore, the determination is not always accurate, but to some extent. Variable display results and fluctuation patterns can be predicted with accuracy. Further, in the winning random number value determination process, the start is started by the process of step S304 based on the case where it is determined that the big hit is being made in the process of step S302 or the time reduction control is being performed in the process of step S303. It is determined whether or not the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process proceeds to step S314 without executing the process such as step S305, and the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. In this way, when the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is performed or when the big hit game state is performed, each of the above is based on the occurrence of the start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening. Limit the judgment so that it is not made. As a result, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, and the time reduction control is in progress or the jackpot game state is in effect, the first start prize is won. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by limiting the pre-reading based on the above.

FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot when the special figure display result is "big hit" (step S262). When it is determined in the process of step S261 that the big hit flag is in the off state (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is in the on state (step S263). When it is determined that the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern corresponding to the small hit when the special figure display result is "small hit" (step S264). On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is in the off state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is "loss" according to the number of reserved storages. (Step S265).

FIG. 10-5 shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern in this embodiment.

The variation pattern PA1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "missing", specifies non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and has a normal special figure variation time. It is a non-reach variation pattern of length. The fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern selected when the number of reserved storages is less than 2.

The fluctuation pattern PA1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "missing", specifies non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and the special figure fluctuation time is longer than usual. Is also a short (shortening variation) non-reach variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern selected when the number of reserved storages is 2 or more.

The variation pattern PA2-1 is selected when the variable display result is “missing”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PA2-2 is selected when the variable display result is “missing”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the super reach A. The variation pattern PA2-3 is selected when the variable display result is “missing”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the super reach B.

The variation pattern PB1-1 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PB1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of super reach A. The variation pattern PB1-3 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the super reach B.

The variable pattern PC1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability", and when the variable display result is "small hit", and specifies non-reach. It is a non-reach fluctuation pattern. The variable pattern PC1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "sudden probability", and when the variable display result is "small hit", and is exclusively for sudden / small hit. A reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of reach. Here, the reach for exclusive use of the sudden / small hit is a reach that can be selected and determined only when the variable display result is the sudden big hit or the small hit. The decorative symbol for the sudden jackpot is a symbol in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed at "3", "5", and "7". The decorative symbol for small hits is a symbol in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed at "2", "4", and "6".

In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 10-4, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (A) stored in advance in the predetermined area of ROM 101. Will be done. As an example, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby assigns the variation assigned to the determination value matching the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current fluctuation pattern. In FIG. 10-6 (A), the determination ratio is shown instead of the determination value.

In the process of step S264 shown in FIG. 10-4, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of small hit is used in the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (B) stored in advance in the predetermined area of the ROM 101. Is determined. As an example, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 is assigned to a determined value that matches the random number value MR3 by referring to the small hit variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation. The fluctuation pattern may be determined (selected) as the current fluctuation pattern. In addition, in FIG. 10-6 (B), the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 10-4, for example, using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10-6 (C) and 10-6 (D) stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, the time of loss The fluctuation pattern is determined. When the gaming state is the non-time saving state (time saving flag is off), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (C). When the game state is the time saving state (time saving flag is on), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (D). As an example, in each loss fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby assigns the variation assigned to the determination value matching the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current fluctuation pattern. In FIGS. 10-6 (C) and 10-6 (D), the determination ratio is shown instead of the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 10-6, at the time of big hit (probability change / non-probability change), the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB1-3 that executes the super reach B is the highest, and the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 and the normal reach of the super reach A are the highest. The determination rate gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation pattern PB1-1. At the time of loss, the determination rate of the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 (including PA1-2) is the highest, and the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, the super reach A variation pattern PA2-2, and the super reach B are determined. The determination rate gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation pattern PA2-3. From this, when Super Reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at the highest rate. Then, in the order of Super Reach A and Normal Reach, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (so-called big hit expectation) decreases. That is, the variable display in which the reach effect of the super reach is performed has a higher ratio of the variable display result being a "big hit" than the variable display in which the reach effect is not performed. In other words, the longer the variable display period (variable display time), the higher the proportion of the variable display result being a "big hit".

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, at the time of big hit (sudden probability), the determination ratio of the variation pattern PC1-2 of the collision / small hit reach is higher than the determination ratio of the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1. On the other hand, at the time of small hit, the determination ratio of the non-reach fluctuation pattern PC1-1 is higher than the determination ratio of the sudden / small hit reach fluctuation pattern PC1-2. From this, when the variation pattern PC1-2 of the sudden / small hit reach is executed, the variable display result tends to be “big hit (abrupt probability)”, and when the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1 is executed, The variable display result tends to be a "small hit".

After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and S265 of FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time (also referred to as fluctuation time), which is the variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIG. 10-5, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in each of the processes of steps S262, S264, and S265. The special figure fluctuation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value according to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the process of step S266, the start of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. A setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the conditions are satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold display 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted 1st special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25A may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 issues a command at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (command at the start of fluctuation) in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, and the like. Transmission settings are made (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( A command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in steps S262, S264, or S265), a display result specification command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a first special figure hold storage number specification command (command containing EXT data indicating the determined variable display result). The 1-decreased 1st special figure hold storage count value, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the 1st special figure hold storage when one hold memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Set the transmission settings for this. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the second fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( A command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in steps S262, S264 or S265), a display result specification command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a second special figure hold storage number specification command (1). The decremented second special figure reserved memory count value, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Set the transmission settings for.

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and then ends the variation pattern setting process. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 5 is executed.

Next, the processing of the feature unit 085AK on the effect control board 12 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning command (start winning opening designation command, special figure hold storage number designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command) from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it was present (step S401).

When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). When the 1st start winning opening designation command or the 1st special figure hold storage number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (1st start winning opening designation command, 1st special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the first start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. When a second start winning opening designation command or a second special figure hold storage number designation command is received as a start winning command, a start winning command (second start winning opening designation command, second special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the second start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-8 (A) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning. In the first start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the starting winning command received at the time of the first starting winning is stored. The command buffer at the time of winning the first start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the number of hold storages in the first special figure. Area to be used) is provided. As shown in the figure, the command buffer at the time of the first start winning in the feature unit 085AK in this embodiment has an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display during execution are stored as the hold display number “0”. Is provided (the same applies to the command buffer at the time of winning the second start).

When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening, 4 commands, 1st starting winning opening designation command, 1st special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and variation pattern judgment result designation command, are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, in addition to these first start winning opening designation command, first special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, and other information are held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the first start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the first start, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the first start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the first start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, the command buffer at the time of winning the first start is provided with a storage area for storing a lighting pattern described later as a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers. The lighting pattern is a type showing a pattern of when a predetermined lamp is to emit light. The lighting patterns corresponding to the hold display numbers "0" to "4" in the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) include "PT4-3-01", "0", "0", "0", respectively. "0" is stored. As will be described later, "PT4-3-01" is a lighting pattern determined when the number of reserved memories (number of pending) is "4", and at the time of winning, during the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation. It is a pattern in which three predetermined lamps are made to emit light three times in the middle. When the lighting pattern is "0", the lighting pattern is not set and the lamp effect is not executed. Although not shown, the command buffer at the time of winning the first start shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) is an area for storing information indicating which light emission mode (see FIG. 10-15). Is also provided (the same applies to the command buffer at the time of winning the second start shown in FIG. 10-8 (B)).

Further, FIG. 10-8 (B) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start. In the second start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning received command received at the time of the second starting winning is stored. The command buffer at the time of winning the second start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the second special figure hold storage number. Area to be used) is provided. Similar to the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, the command buffer at the time of the second start winning in the feature unit 085AK in this embodiment has a hold display number “0” as shown in the variable display during execution. An area is provided for storing various corresponding command data.

When there is a start prize to the 2nd start winning opening, 4 commands: 2nd starting winning opening designation command, 2nd special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and variation pattern judgment result designation command are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, in addition to these second start winning opening designation command, second special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, and other information are held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the second start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the second start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the second start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, in the second start winning command buffer, similarly to the first starting winning command buffer, a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers is provided, and a display stage change pattern described later is provided. A storage area for storing is provided. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), an example is shown in which the effect control command data is not stored in any of the storage areas of the hold display numbers “0” to “4”.

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-7, after executing step S402, or when it is determined that the command at the time of starting winning is not received (step S401; No), the effect control CPU 120 , It is determined whether or not the game state designation command has been received (step S403). When it is determined that the game state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 switches the on / off state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the content of the received game state designation command. (Step S404).

The high-probability flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the probable change state, and is a probabilistic flag on the main board 11 side. The on state / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. The high base flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the time saving state, and is a time saving flag on the main board 11 side. The on state / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. For example, when the game state specification command specifies the high accuracy high base state (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be on), the effect control CPU 120 has a high accuracy flag and a high accuracy flag. Turn both base flags on (if they are already on, keep them on. The same applies to the on / off states for both flags). When the game state specification command specifies the high probability low base state (for example, when the probability variation flag is on and the time saving flag is off), the high probability flag is turned on and the high base is set. Turn off the flag. When the game state specification command specifies the low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be off), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are used. Turn it off.

After executing step S404, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and the command analysis processing To finish.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10-9, a process executed in response to the reception of each effect control command in the command analysis process will be described. The content shown in the item of "process content" shown in FIG. 10-9 is, for example, the process executed in step S405. Further, the step number shown in the item of "process content" indicates the step number in the flowchart shown in FIG. 10-7, and means that the corresponding step process is executed. Further, each reception flag and each storage area shown in the item of "processing content" are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Also, setting the receive flag means turning it on.

For example, when the received effect control command is a variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variation pattern command reception flag.

Further, for example, when the received effect control command is a display result specification command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the lookahead advance notice setting process in step S161 shown in FIG. 7. When the look-ahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-10 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning command has been received (step 085AKS001). When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step 085AKS001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the received starting winning command is the first hold storage number addition designation command received in the low base state, or the high. It is determined whether or not the command is one of the second reserved storage number addition designation commands received in the base state (step 085AKS002). In the present embodiment, by executing the process of step 085AKS002, the pre-reading advance notice effect (ramp effect) can be executed when the hold memory increases based on the winning of the first start winning opening in the low base state. Therefore, in the high base state, the pre-reading advance notice effect (lamp effect) can be executed when the hold memory increases based on the winning of the second start winning opening. In the high base state, the accessory 85AK001 may be moved from the position shown in FIG. 10-1 to the upper part (above the image display device 5) to perform an effect different from the lamp effect. That is, the execution of the lamp effect may be restricted in the high base state. Then, when the base state becomes low, the accessory 85AK001 may be returned to the position shown in FIG. 10-1 again so that the lamp effect can be executed.

When it is determined that either the first start winning opening designation command received in the low base state or the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state (step 085AKS002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 Determines whether or not the number of reserved storages corresponding to the winning start winning opening is 2 or more (step 085AKS003). When the number of held storages is 2 or more (step 085AKS003; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the lamp effect flag indicating that the lamp effect is being executed is set to the ON state (step). 085AKS004). The lamp effect flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and is set to the on state in step 085AKS009 described later, and then cleared to the off state by the end of the lamp effect (step 085AKS034 described later). In the feature unit 085AK in this embodiment, the execution of the lamp effect is started when the lamp effect flag is set to the on state, and the lamp effect is executed when the lamp effect flag is cleared to the off state. It is said that it has finished.

When the lamp effect is not being executed, that is, when the lamp effect flag is off (step 085AKS), the effect control CPU 120 indicates whether or not the lamp effect is executed, the lamp points, and the number of lamps lit, as shown in FIGS. 10-11. It is determined according to the variable display result according to the determination ratio with reference to the number determination table. The number of lamps lit is the number of the predetermined lamps to be emitted from the three predetermined lamps of the predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1) on the left side, the predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2) in the center, and the predetermined lamp 85AK004 (lamp 3) on the right side. Say a number. The effect control CPU 120 may acquire the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display by referring to the symbol determination result designation command and the variation pattern determination result specification command included in the start winning command.

The lamp lighting number determination table shown in FIG. 10-11 is a table referred to for determining whether or not the lamp effect is executed and the number of predetermined lamps to be emitted when the lamp effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 10-11, the lamp lighting number determination table is set to "No execution" for each variable display result (including jackpot type and fluctuation pattern) and lighting when the lamp effect is executed. A decision ratio is assigned to each of the numbers "1" to "3". More specifically, the variable display results are classified into "big hit", "miss (super reach) / small hit", and "other than the above", and are classified into "no execution", "1", "2", and "2". Different decision ratios are assigned to each of the "three". As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 085AK, the determination ratio is assigned so that the larger the number of lamps that emit light in the lamp effect (the larger the number of lamps lit), the higher the expectation of a big hit. Further, in the illustrated example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio is not assigned for the number of lights being "1". Therefore, it is possible to fuel the player's expectation that the number of lights will be "2" or more. If the variable display result is a "big hit" and the determination ratio is assigned so that the larger the number of lamps that emit light (the larger the number of lamps lit), the higher the expectation of a big hit, the number of lights will be increased. A decision ratio may be assigned to "1" (it does not have to be "0").

After returning to FIG. 10-10 and executing the process of step 085AKS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the lamp effect in step 085AKS005 (step 085AKS006). When it is determined to execute the lamp effect (step 085AKS006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of lamps lit and the first special figure hold storage number designation command and the second special figure hold memory number designation command determined in step 085AKS005. The lighting pattern is determined according to the number of reserved storages shown in any of the above (step 085AKS007). As for the number of reserved storages, the first special figure holding storage number designation command is received when the first start winning opening designation command is received, and the second special figure is obtained when the second starting winning opening designation command is received. It may be specified by referring to the hold storage number specification command. In the process of step 085AKS007, the lighting pattern is determined with reference to the lighting pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14. The lighting pattern is a pattern that defines the timing for lighting the lamp to be emitted. The lighting pattern determined in step 085AKS007 is the lighting pattern in the first start winning command buffer shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) or in the second starting winning command buffer shown in FIG. 10-8 (B). It is stored in the storage area of. By determining the lighting pattern, the timing for turning on the predetermined lamp and the timing for turning off the predetermined lamp are determined as the lamp effect period.

As described above, the lighting pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14 is referred to for determining a lighting pattern indicating when to light a predetermined lamp to be light-emitting in the lamp effect. It is a table. The lighting pattern determination table is classified according to the number of holds (the hold display number of the hold storage which is the notice target of the hold notice effect) and the number of lamp lights. Specifically, the lighting pattern determination table is divided according to the number of holdings of "4" to "2" and the number of lighting of predetermined lamps such as "1" to "3". In addition, in each lighting pattern determination table classified by the number of hold and the number of lighting of the predetermined lamp, the predetermined lamp is lit for each variable display result such as "big hit", "loss (super reach) / small hit", and "other". Different decision ratios are assigned to the lighting patterns set according to the number. Further, in the feature unit 085AK, as the timing for causing the predetermined lamp to emit light, "at the time of winning" indicating when a winning target (target) for the look-ahead notice occurs, and "during target change" during variable display of the target. And, there are timings such as, during multiple fluctuations from "at the time of winning" to "during target fluctuation" (depending on the number of reserved memories). For example, the timing of "during the first fluctuation" refers to the first variable display performed after the target wins a prize, that is, the variable display executed by shifting the hold display once. , Does not include variable display at the time of winning.

10-12 (A) to 10-12 (C) show when the number of reserved memories (number of pending) is "4" (when the reserved memory to be notified of the lamp effect is the reserved display number "4"). It is a reference lighting pattern determination table.

FIG. 10-12 (A) is a lighting pattern determination table referred to when the number of lighting of the predetermined lamp is three (number of lighting: 3). As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A), since the number of reserved memories is "4" and the number of lights is "3", "at the time of winning", "during the first fluctuation", and "during the second fluctuation". The lighting pattern is set so that the predetermined lamps are lit one by one at three of the respective timings of "during the third change" and "during the target change" (not shown). There is also a pattern). As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 085AK, the determination ratio is assigned so that the determined lighting number is lit at an earlier timing and the jackpot expectation is higher than when the determined lighting number is lit at a later timing. (Same below). On the contrary, the jackpot expectation may be set to be higher when the number of lights determined at a later timing is turned on than when the lights are turned on at an earlier timing. Further, in the illustrated example, an example in which one predetermined lamp is lit at one timing is shown, but even if there is a lighting pattern (for example, FIG. 10-14) in which a plurality of predetermined lamps are lit at one timing. Good (same below). According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the timing at which the predetermined lamp is turned on.

FIG. 10-12 (B) is a lighting pattern determination table referred to when the number of lightings of the predetermined lamp is two (number of lightings: 2). As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B), since the number of reserved memories is "4" and the number of lights is "2", "at the time of winning", "during the first fluctuation", and "during the second fluctuation". The lighting pattern is set so that the predetermined lamps are lit one by one at two of the respective timings of "during the third change" and "during the target change" (not shown). There is also a pattern).

FIG. 10-12 (C) is a lighting pattern determination table referred to when the number of lighting of the predetermined lamp is one (number of lighting: 1). As shown in FIG. 10-12 (C), since the number of reserved memories is "4" and the number of lights is "1", "at the time of winning", "during the first fluctuation", and "during the second fluctuation". The lighting pattern is set so that one predetermined lamp is lit at any one of the timings of "3rd fluctuation", "target fluctuation" (not shown). There are also patterns).

10-13 (A) to 10-13 (C) show when the number of reserved memories (number of pending) is "3" (when the reserved memory of the lamp effect notice target is the reserved display number "3"). It is a reference lighting pattern determination table.

FIG. 10-13 (A) is a lighting pattern determination table referred to when the number of lightings of the predetermined lamp is three (number of lightings: 3). As shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), since the number of reserved memories is "3" and the number of lights is "3", "at the time of winning", "during the first fluctuation", and "during the second fluctuation". The lighting pattern is set so that the predetermined lamps are lit one by one at three of the respective timings of "" and "during target change" (some patterns are not shown).

FIG. 10-13 (B) is a lighting pattern determination table referred to when the number of lightings of the predetermined lamp is two (number of lightings: 2). As shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), since the number of reserved memories is "3" and the number of lights is "2", "at the time of winning", "during the first fluctuation", and "during the second fluctuation". The lighting pattern is set so that the predetermined lamps are lit one by one at two of the respective timings of "" and "during target change" (some patterns are not shown).

FIG. 10-13 (C) is a lighting pattern determination table referred to when the number of lightings of the predetermined lamp is one (number of lightings: 1). As shown in FIG. 10-13 (C), since the number of reserved memories is "4" and the number of lights is "1", "at the time of winning", "during the first fluctuation", and "during the second fluctuation". A lighting pattern is set so that one predetermined lamp is lit at any one of the timings of "" and "during target change" (some patterns are not shown).

10-14 (A) to 10-14 (C) show when the number of pending storage (number of pending) is "2" (when the reserved storage to be notified of the lamp effect is the pending display number "2"). It is a reference lighting pattern determination table.

FIG. 10-14 (A) is a lighting pattern determination table referred to when the number of lightings of the predetermined lamp is three (number of lightings: 3). As shown in FIG. 10-14 (A), since the number of reserved memories is "2" and the number of lights is "3", "at the time of winning", "during the first change", and "during the target change". A lighting pattern in which a predetermined lamp is lit one by one at three timings of each of the above three timings, and a pattern in which one and two lamps are lit at two of these three timings (one is lit first). There is a pattern, there may be a pattern in which two lights are turned on first), and a pattern in which three lights are turned on at any one of these three timings (not shown). There are also patterns). In the illustrated example, the pattern in which the lights are turned on one by one is assigned a determination ratio so that the expectation of a big hit is higher than the pattern in which three lights are turned on at once. On the contrary, the decision ratio may be assigned so that the pattern in which three lights are lit at once has a higher expectation of big hit. According to this, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the game entertainment.

FIG. 10-14 (B) is a lighting pattern determination table referred to when the number of lightings of the predetermined lamp is two (number of lightings: 2). As shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), since the number of reserved memories is "2" and the number of lights is "2", "at the time of winning", "during the first change", and "during the target change". A lighting pattern in which a predetermined lamp is lit at two timings of each of the above timings and a lighting pattern in which two lamps are lit at any one timing are set (not shown). There is also a pattern). In the illustrated example, the pattern in which the lights are turned on one by one is assigned a determination ratio so that the expectation of a big hit is higher than the pattern in which the two lights are turned on at once, but the opposite is true. In addition, the determination ratio may be assigned so that the pattern in which two lights are lit at once has a higher expectation of big hit. Further, when two lights are turned on at once, a determination ratio may be assigned so that the higher the jackpot expectation is, the later the lights are turned on. According to this, the variation of the production is increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

FIG. 10-13 (C) is a lighting pattern determination table referred to when the number of lightings of the predetermined lamp is one (number of lightings: 1). As shown in FIG. 10-13 (C), since the number of reserved memories is "2" and the number of lights is "1", "at the time of winning", "during the first change", and "during the target change". A lighting pattern is set so that one predetermined lamp is lit at any one of the timings (some patterns are not shown).

Of the lighting timings of the lighting patterns in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the timing of "at the time of winning" may be the timing when the game medium wins the starting winning opening and the hold display is performed. Further, among the lighting timings of the lighting patterns in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the timings of "during the first fluctuation" to "during the third fluctuation" and the timing of "during the target fluctuation" are variable. Any timing may be determined by lottery from a plurality of timings in the variable display according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display. It may be a predetermined timing (for example, the timing immediately after the start of fluctuation). In the feature unit 085AK in this embodiment, the lighting pattern is determined by the process of step 085AKS007 in FIG. 10-10, so that the timing of “first fluctuation” to “third fluctuation” and “target fluctuation” and “target fluctuation” Regarding the "medium" timing, one of the multiple timings in the variable display is determined according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to each variable display.

After determining the lighting pattern in step 085AKS007 shown in FIG. 10-10, the effect control CPU 120 uses the left predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1), the central predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2), and the right predetermined lamp 85AK004 (lamp 1). A light emitting mode indicating which of the three predetermined lamps, such as 3), is to be emitted in which order and in which emission color is determined (step 085AKS008). Specifically, in step 085AKS008, the light emission mode is determined to be either "Aspect A" or "Aspect B" according to the variable display result according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-15. As shown in the figure, "Aspect A" is a light emitting mode in which the predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1) on the left side, the predetermined lamp 85AK004 (lamp 3) on the right side, and the predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2) in the center are emitted in this order. , "Aspect B" is a light emitting mode in which the predetermined lamp 85AK004 (lamp 3) on the right side, the predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1) on the left side, and the predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2) in the center are emitted in this order. In the illustrated example, the light emitting mode of "Aspect A" has a higher expectation of big hit than the light emitting mode of "Aspect B". According to this, it is possible to pay attention to the light emitting mode such as the order in which the plurality of predetermined lamps emit light. In addition, the determination ratio may be assigned so that the jackpot expectation is higher in "Aspect B" than in "Aspect A". When the number of lightings of the predetermined lamp is "3", the lamp lights up to the third lighting order shown in the figure (lights are emitted), and when the number of lightings is "2", the lamp lights up to the second lighting order shown in the figure. (Make it emit light), and when the number of lights is "1", it is sufficient to light up to the first lighting order shown in the figure (it is sufficient to make it emit light).

Further, in the feature unit 085AK, as shown in the figure, when the third lamp is lit, the central predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2) is the last regardless of whether it is the “aspect A” or the “aspect B”. It is designed to light up. Further, in the feature unit 085AK, a predetermined image is displayed on the corresponding liquid crystal display device in accordance with the lighting of each predetermined lamp. Specifically, a predetermined image having the same color as the emission color of the predetermined lamp is displayed on the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the lamp 1 in accordance with the light emission of the predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1) on the left side. The image is displayed according to the light emission of the predetermined lamp. According to this, the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, in the feature unit 085AK, the lighting order is different between "Aspect A" and "Aspect B", and the emission color is set to be different even if the same predetermined lamp is used, and the central predetermined lamp 85AK003 that is lit last is set. Only (lamp 2) has a common emission color. Specifically, in the case of the light emitting mode of "Aspect A", the lamp 1 is made to emit light in "blue", the lamp 3 is made to emit light in "green", and finally the lamp 2 is made to emit light in "red" (the liquid crystal of the aspect). The same applies to the color of a predetermined image displayed on the display device). On the other hand, in the case of the light emitting mode of "Aspect B", the lamp 3 is made to emit light in "yellow", the lamp 1 is made to emit light in "orange", and finally the lamp 2 is made to emit light in "red" (the liquid crystal display in the aspect). The same applies to the color of the predetermined image displayed on the device). According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention not only to the lighting order but also to the emission color. In step 085AKS008 of FIG. 10-10, the emission color of a predetermined lamp and the lighting order (order of emitting light) of the predetermined lamp are determined. In the feature unit 085AK in this embodiment, three predetermined lamps such as the predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1) on the left side, the predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2) in the center, and the predetermined lamp 85AK004 (lamp 3) on the right side are lit. Although an example in which the order and the emission color are different is shown, the number of predetermined lamps is not limited to three, and more than five may be provided, and the lighting order and emission color of each may be different. Further, the predetermined lamp is one, and the lighting timing and the emission color may be different. Further, the light emitting mode of the feature unit 085AK in this embodiment shows an example in which there are two light emitting modes having different light emitting colors, but in addition, the light emitting mode for blinking a predetermined lamp and the speed of blinking are different. A plurality of different light emitting modes may be included. In addition, in the feature unit 085AK in this embodiment, the central predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2) is the last in both the light emitting mode of "Aspect A" and the light emitting mode of "Aspect B". Although an example of emitting light is shown, there may be a light emitting mode in which the predetermined lamp to be emitted last is not the central predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2), that is, a light emitting mode out of the law. In this case, in the case of a light emitting mode that does not meet the law, it is sufficient that the jackpot expectation is higher than that of other light emitting modes. Further, although the predetermined lamp to be finally emitted is the central predetermined lamp 85AK003 (lamp 2), there may be a light emitting mode other than "red" (for example, "rainbow color"). In this case as well, it is sufficient that the jackpot expectation is higher than in other light emitting modes.

After determining the light emitting mode in step 085AKS008 shown in FIG. 10-10, the effect control CPU 120 sets the lamp effect flag to the ON state (step 085AKS009).

After executing the process of step 085AKS009, it is determined that neither of the first start winning opening designation command received in the low base state and the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state in step 085AKS002 When (step 085AKS002; No), when the number of reserved memories is less than 2 in step 085AKS003 (step 085AKS003; No), and when it is determined in step 085AKS004 that the lamp effect flag is on (step 085AKS004; Yes). Alternatively, when it is determined in step 085AKS006 that the lamp effect is not executed (step 085AKS006; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display or the second hold display (step 085AKS010). In the process of step 085AKS010, if the lighting pattern determined in step 085AKS007 is a lighting pattern that causes the predetermined lamp to emit light at the timing of "at the time of winning", the predetermined lamp to be emitted is emitted in accordance with the hold display. Perform the process of causing.

After executing the process of step 085AKS010, or when it is determined in step 085AKS001 that the start winning command has not been received (step 085AKS001; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the fluctuation start designation command. Is determined (step 085AKS011). Whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the fluctuation start designation command by referring to whether or not either the first fluctuation start designation command reception flag or the second fluctuation start designation command reception flag is set, for example. It may be judged whether or not. When it is determined that the variation start designation command has not been received (step 085AKS011; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the lookahead advance notice setting process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start designation command has been received (step 085AKS011; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received variation start designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 085AKS012). .. When it is determined that the received fluctuation start designation command is not the second fluctuation start designation command, that is, the received fluctuation start designation command is the first fluctuation start designation command (step 085AKS012; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines. The display position of each first hold display corresponding to "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) to the right by one (step 085AKS013).

After executing the process of step 085AKS013, the effect control CPU 120 erases the stored contents of the hold display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, and corresponds to the hold display numbers "1" to "4". After shifting the stored contents one by one (step 085AKS014), the look-ahead advance notice setting process ends. Regarding the stored contents of the hold display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, after the final stop symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display effect processing in step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You may erase it afterwards.

In the process of step 085AKS012, when it is determined that the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 074AKS012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is each second corresponding to "2" to "4". The display position of the hold display is moved (shifted) to the left one by one (step 085AKS015).

After executing the process of step 085AKS015, the effect control CPU 120 erases the stored contents of the hold display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, and corresponds to the hold display numbers "1" to "4". After shifting the stored contents one by one (step 085AKS016), the look-ahead advance notice setting process ends. Regarding the stored contents of the hold display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, after the final stop symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display effect processing in step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You may erase it afterwards.

FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. 7. When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first features, for example, based on a display result specification command (command stored in the display result specification command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the figure display result is "missing" (step S551). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing" (step S551; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in, for example, the variation pattern specification command (variation pattern specification command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. The variation pattern specified by the command) is a non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1, PA1-2, PC1-1) corresponding to the case of "non-reach" in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode. Whether or not it is determined (step S552).

When it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination (step S553). ). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of a non-reach combination updated by, for example, an effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and outputs the ROM 121. The final decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the non-reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative symbol determination table of the non-reach combination prepared in advance.

When it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination (step S554). ). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of the reach combination updated by, for example, a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect, and stores the reach combination in advance in the ROM 121. The final decorative design (decorative design of the reach combination) is determined by referring to the decoration design determination table of.

When it is determined in the process of step S551 that the special figure display result is not "missing" (step S551; No), whether the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability" in the effect control CPU 120. , Or, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S555). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "probability" or "small hit" (step S555; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is in the case of "probability" or "small hit", for example, at the opening chance eye. A combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol corresponding to the case is determined (step S556). The effect control CPU 120 finally configures one of a plurality of types of open chances in response to the designation of either the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 or the PC1-2 by the fluctuation pattern designation command. Determine the combination of fixed decorative symbols that will be the stop symbols. In this case, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the chance eye, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit, is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is used. By referring to or the like, it is sufficient to determine the combination of the definite decorative symbols that constitute one of the opening chance eyes. In the chance eye determination table, for example, "3", "5", "7" composed of odd numbers as chance eyes for sudden big hits, and "2", "2", "7" composed of even numbers as chance eyes for small hits. It suffices if "4", "6" and the like are set.

When it is determined in the process of step S555 that the special figure display result is neither "probability" nor "small hit" (step S555; No), the effect control CPU 120 is a final stop symbol that constitutes the big hit combination. The combination of symbols is determined (step S557). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by, for example, a random number circuit 124 or a random number counter for effect. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the image display device 5 A decorative symbol having the same stop-displayed symbol number is determined in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the display area.

After executing any of the processes of steps S553, S554, S556, and S557, the effect control CPU 120 executes the on / off control process (step 085AKS021). The lighting / extinguishing control process is a process of turning on a predetermined lamp to be turned on and turning off the predetermined lamp to be turned off according to the lighting pattern and the light emitting mode determined in step 085AKS007 and step 085AKS008 of FIG. 10-10. It is performed every time the variable display is started. This may cause problems such as when the predetermined lamp to be turned off is turned off or the predetermined lamp to be turned off is turned on, and in such a case, the player is confused. Therefore, even if a problem occurs, the lighting / extinguishing control process is executed so that the lighting pattern should be obtained as soon as possible. When the predetermined lamp is turned on in a manner of notifying that an error has occurred, the lighting / extinguishing control process may not be executed.

FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the on / off control process executed in step 085AKS021 of FIG. 10-16. When the on / off control process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the lamp effect flag is set to the ON state (step 085AKS022). When the lamp effect flag is on (step 085AKS022; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a predetermined lamp to be lit (step 085AKS023). In step 085AKS023, it may be determined whether or not there is a predetermined lamp to be lit by checking the lighting pattern and the light emitting mode stored in the command buffer at the time of starting winning.

When it is determined in step 085AKS023 that there is a predetermined lamp to be lit (step 085AKS023), the effect control CPU 120 controls to light the predetermined lamp to be lit (step 085AKS024). For example, when the lighting pattern stored in the command buffer at the time of starting winning is "PT4-3-01" and the light emitting mode is "mode A", the variable display setting process is 1 from the target winning. When the variable display setting process for the second variable display is performed (when the information of the target to be read ahead is stored in the hold display number "3" in the command buffer at the time of starting winning), in step 085AKS025, at the time of winning. Since the lamp 1 emits light in "blue", the lamp 1 (predetermined lamp 85AK002 on the left side) is determined as a predetermined lamp to be lit, and the lamp 1 is controlled to emit light in "blue" (control to light). )I do. It should be noted that the lamp 3 that lights up at the timing of "during the first fluctuation" is turned on when the lighting timing comes in the variable display in-process described later, and the lighting control is not performed in the process of the step 085AKS025. .. That is, in the process of step 085AKS025, the predetermined lamp to be turned on before the execution of the lighting / extinguishing control process is controlled to be turned on regardless of whether or not it is turned on.

After executing the process of step 085AKS024, or when it is determined in step 085AKS023 that there is no predetermined lamp to be turned on (step 085AKS023; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a predetermined lamp to be turned off. Determine (step 085AKS025). In step 085AKS025, it may be determined whether or not there is a predetermined lamp to be turned off by checking the lighting pattern and the light emitting mode stored in the command buffer at the time of starting winning.

When it is determined in step 085AKS025 that there is a predetermined lamp to be turned off (step 085AKS025), or when it is determined in step 085AKS022 that the lamp effect flag is off (step 085AKS025; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines. Control is performed to turn off a predetermined lamp to be turned off (step 085AKS026). For example, when the lighting pattern stored in the command buffer at the time of starting winning is "PT4-3-01" and the light emitting mode is "mode A", the variable display setting process is 1 from the target winning. In step 085AKS025, when the variable display setting process for the second variable display is performed, the lamp 1 is emitting light in "blue" at the time of winning, and the lamp 2 and the lamp 3 are extinguished. Therefore, the lamp 2 and the lamp 3 are extinguished. (The predetermined lamp 85AK003 in the center and the predetermined lamp 85AK004 on the right side) are determined as the predetermined lamps to be turned off, and the lamp 2 and the lamp 3 are controlled to be turned off. That is, in the process of step 085AKS025, the predetermined lamp to be turned off before the execution of the lighting / extinguishing control process is controlled to be turned off regardless of whether or not the lamp is turned off.

After executing the process of step 085AKS026, or when it is determined in step 085AKS025 that there is no predetermined lamp to be turned off (step 085AKS025; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the on / off control process.

Returning to the description of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-16, after executing the process of step 085AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect control pattern to one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S560). ). The effect control CPU 120 selects and uses one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result specification command. Set as a pattern. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (hold display change patterns) in response to the execution setting of the hold display change effect by the hold display setting process in step S161, and uses the pattern. Set as. If it is determined in step S559 that the specific effect is to be executed, one of the effect control patterns (specific effect control pattern) corresponding to the execution of the specific effect is selected and set as the pattern to be used.

Following the process of step S560, the effect control CPU 120 is provided in a predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result designation command, for example. The initial value of the control process timer is set (step S561). Then, a setting is made on the display screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S562). At this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, issues a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in the process of step S559 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. In each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are started to fluctuate. Just do it.

After executing the process of step S562, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S563), and then performs the variable display start setting process. To finish.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect processing executed in step S172 shown in FIG. 7. When the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10-18 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer. Determine (step S801). For example, when the effect control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the effect control process timer (for example, 1 is subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern in response to the updated effect control process timer value. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

When it is determined in the process of step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect (step S801). S802). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step S802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the reach effect (step S803).

After executing the process of step S803, or when it is determined in step S802 that it is not the reach effect period (step S802; No), the effect control CPU 120 turns on the predetermined lamp as the lamp effect (lamp effect). (Timing) is determined (step 085AKS031). As described above, the lighting timing is determined by determining the lighting pattern in the process of step 085AKS007 in FIG. 10-10. When it is the lamp effect timing (step 085AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp effect control to light (light up) a predetermined lamp to be lit (step 085AKS032). In step 085AKS032, control is performed to light (light) a predetermined lamp to be lit according to the lighting pattern stored in the start winning command buffer of the variable display target and the light emitting mode. Further, in step 085AKS032, a predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the predetermined lamp to be lit. The predetermined image to be displayed is an image having the same color as the emission color of the predetermined lamp. For example, when the lighting pattern stored in the command buffer at the time of starting winning is "PT4-3-01" and the light emitting mode is "mode A", the effect processing during variable display is performed from the target winning. When the process during variable display for the first variable display is being performed (when the information of the target to be read ahead is stored in the hold display number "3" in the command buffer at the time of starting winning), it lights up in step 085AKS032. As the target predetermined lamp, the lamp 3 (the predetermined lamp 85AK004 on the right side) is controlled to emit light in "green", and the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the lamp 3 is controlled to display the predetermined image in "green".

After executing the process of step 085AKS032, or when it is not the lamp effect timing (step 085AKS031; No), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the settings in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and other minis. Control is performed to execute the effect during the variable display including the game and the variable display operation of the decorative symbol (step S808), and the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S809). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S809; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the process waits.

When the symbol confirmation command is received in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the symbol (step S810).

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the lamp effect, that is, whether or not it is the timing to turn off the predetermined lamp (step 085AKS033). The lamp effect end timing is determined by determining the lighting pattern in the process of step 085AKS007 in FIG. 10-10. When it is the end timing of the lamp effect (step 085AKS033; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the lamp effect flag to the off state (step 085AKS034) and controls to turn off all the predetermined lamps (step 085AKS035). In the feature unit 085AK in this embodiment, the end timing of the target variation is set as the end timing of the lamp effect as the end timing of the lamp effect.

After executing the process of step 085AKS035, or when it is determined in step 085AKS033 that it is not the lamp effect end timing (step 085AKS033; No), the effect control CPU 120 has a predetermined fixed waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command. Set the time (step S811). Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S812), and ends the variable display effect process.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the lamp effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20. In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the lamp effect of the light emitting mode of "Aspect A" is performed with the lighting pattern of "PT4-3-01", and the variable display result is "big hit". Shows the case. As shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the game ball is placed in the first start winning opening in a state where three hold displays H1 to hold display H3 are stored and variable display is performed. When a prize is won, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (B), a new hold display H4 is displayed, and the timing of "at the time of winning" in the lighting pattern of "PT4-3-01" and the timing of "aspect A" Based on the light emission mode, the predetermined lamp 85AK002 (lamp 1) on the left side emits light in "blue", and a predetermined blue image (a star image in the illustrated example) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the lamp 1. Will be done. At the start timing of the variable display shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the lamps 1 to 3 are turned off by the process of step 085AKS021 in FIG. 10-16.

The timing at which the variable display ends as shown in FIG. 10-19 (C) and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H1 starts as shown in FIG. 10-19 (D) (the first time from the target of the lamp effect). At the timing when the fluctuation of the lamp 1 is started), the process of step 085AKS021 in FIG. 10-16 controls to turn on the lamp 1, control to turn off the lamp 2 and the lamp 3, and then corresponds to the hold display H1. When the lamp effect timing during the variable display is reached, the predetermined lamp 85AK004 (lamp 3) on the right side is emitted in "green" by the process of step 085AKS032 in FIG. 10-18, and the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the lamp 3 is emitted. A predetermined green image (a triangular image in the illustrated example) is displayed on the screen. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation during the first fluctuation is determined by lottery as the lamp effect timing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (E), the timing at which the variable display corresponding to the hold display H1 ends and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 starts as shown in FIG. 10-19 (F). At (the timing at which the second variation is started from the target of the lamp effect), the control of turning on the lamp 1 and the lamp 3 and the control of turning off the lamp 2 are performed by the process of step 085AKS021 in FIG. 10-16.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (G), when the reach state is reached and the lamp effect timing during the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 is reached, the predetermined lamp in the center is processed by the process of step 085AKS032 in FIG. 10-18. The 85AK003 (lamp 2) emits light in "red", and a predetermined green image (a star-shaped heptagon image in the illustrated example) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the lamp 2. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the timing immediately after the reach state during the second fluctuation is determined by lottery as the lamp effect timing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (H), the timing at which the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 ends and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H3 starts as shown in FIG. 10-20 (I). At (the timing at which the second variation is started from the target of the lamp effect), the lamps 1 to 3 are controlled to be turned on by the process of step 085AKS021 in FIG. 10-16. After that, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display H3 is completed, the variable display corresponding to the hold display H4 is performed, and when the start timing (the timing at which the target fluctuation of the lamp effect is started) is reached, the step of FIG. 10-16 is performed. By the process of 085AKS021, the lamps 1 to 3 are controlled to be turned on. Then, in the target variation which is the variable display corresponding to the hold display H4, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (J), the variable display result of the jackpot is derived and displayed, and the process of step 085AKS035 in FIG. 10-18 is performed. As shown in FIG. 10-20 (K), all the predetermined lamps of the lamps 1 to 3 are turned off, and the lamp effect is completed. The predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the predetermined lamp may change during the execution of the lamp effect, for example, the predetermined image may change to the mode B after the aspect A is displayed. In that case, the light emitting mode of the corresponding predetermined lamp may also be changed. Further, when the predetermined lamp is made to emit light according to the predetermined lighting pattern in the lamp effect, the lighting pattern by another effect may be overwritten.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 085AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a lamp effect that sequentially emits a predetermined lamp over a plurality of variable displays as a lookahead advance notice effect. Then, regardless of whether or not the predetermined lamp is emitting light at the start timing of the variable display executed before the target of the lamp effect and the start timing of the variable display of the target of the lamp effect, "Aspect A" And "Aspect B", the predetermined lamp is made to emit light in the determined light emitting mode. According to this, since the predetermined lamp to be emitted is emitted before the variable display of the target, it is possible to solve the problem and prevent the deterioration of the game interest. Further, when the lamp effect is not executed, at the start timing of the variable display executed before the target of the lamp effect, the predetermined lamp is controlled to be turned off regardless of whether or not the predetermined lamp is emitting light, and the lamp is turned off. When the effect is being executed, at the start timing of the variable display executed before the target of the lamp effect, the predetermined lamp is set to "Aspect A" and "Aspect B" regardless of whether or not the predetermined lamp is emitting light. Of these, control is performed so that the predetermined lamp emits light in the determined light emitting mode. According to this, it is possible to prevent the trouble of turning on and off and suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, since the lighting order of the predetermined lamps is different depending on the light emitting modes of "Aspect A" and "Aspect B", it is possible to prevent a plurality of predetermined lamps from not emitting only specific predetermined lamps, which is a hobby of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the emission color of the predetermined lamp is different depending on the emission mode of "Aspect A" and "Aspect B", it is possible to prevent a problem that the emission color is not emitted according to the effect and suppress the deterioration of the game interest. be able to. Further, since the predetermined lamp to be turned off is controlled to be turned off at the start timing of the variable display, it is possible to prevent a problem that the lamp is not turned off according to the effect and suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 causes the predetermined lamp to emit light, the effect control CPU 120 displays a predetermined image having the same color as the emission color of the predetermined lamp on the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the predetermined lamp. According to this, the light emitting mode of the predetermined lamp differs depending on the predetermined image, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the lamp effect, that is, when it determines "No" in step 085AKS022 of FIG. 10-017, the predetermined lamp is turned off regardless of whether or not the predetermined lamp is emitting light. Control to make it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a useless sense of expectation due to the light emission of the predetermined lamp that should be turned off.

In addition, when some of the predetermined lamps are made to emit light and the other predetermined lamps are turned off, the predetermined lamps to be emitted are controlled to emit light regardless of whether or not they are emitting light. The predetermined lamp to be turned off is controlled to be turned off regardless of whether or not it is turned off. According to this, the predetermined lamp can be turned on and off in a light emitting mode according to the effect.

(Modification example of feature part 085AK)
In the above-mentioned feature unit 085AK, an example is shown in which the lamp effect end timing is set to the end of the target fluctuation and the predetermined lamp is turned off at the end of the target fluctuation, but this is an example. The lamp effect end timing may be a plurality of timings, for example, at the end of the fluctuation, at the time of super reach development, during the super reach production, etc., and any timing may be determined according to the fluctuation pattern of the target fluctuation. Good. Further, instead of turning off all the predetermined lamps at the same timing at the end timing of the lamp effect, the lamps may be turned off in the same order as they were turned on. According to this, it is possible to notify the player who has overlooked or forgotten which lighting order the lighting order is in. In this case, it is desirable to turn off the light before the variable display result is derived and displayed.

Further, in the lamp effect in the feature unit 085AK, an example is shown in which a predetermined image having the same color as the emission color of the lamps 1 to 3 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the accessory 85AK001, which is an example. The display content of the liquid crystal display device in the accessory 85AK001 may be linked with the display content of the image display device 5, and the light emitting mode of the predetermined lamp may be a light emitting mode that matches the linked effect. .. For example, in the image display device 5, character 1 (friend) and character 2 (enemy) play rock-paper-scissors three times, and when the ally wins, the predetermined lamp is emitted and the liquid crystal corresponding to the predetermined lamp to emit the light is emitted. A cooperative effect may be performed such that the display device displays an image (the emission color is the same as in the above embodiment) that can recognize which of "goo", "choki", and "par" is output. In this case, for example, in the lighting pattern of "PT4-3-01", the ally wins with rock-paper-scissors at three timings of winning, the first fluctuation, the second fluctuation, and the third fluctuation, and the target fluctuation. At the two timings inside, allies should be defeated by rock-paper-scissors.

Further, in the feature unit 085AK, it is assumed that the execution of the lamp effect is started when the lamp effect flag is set to the on state, and the execution of the lamp effect is completed when the lamp effect flag is cleared to the off state. An example is shown, but this is just an example. For example, the execution of the lamp effect may be started when it is time to make the first predetermined lamp emit light. Further, the execution of the lamp effect may be completed when all the predetermined lamps (third predetermined lamps) are made to emit light. In this case, the start timing and the end timing of the lamp effect may be determined when the lighting pattern is determined, and the processes of steps 085AKS033 to 085AKS035 in FIG. 10-18 may be executed before the process of step 085AKS031.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion 048AK, the feature portion 063AK, and the feature portion 085AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the respective configurations relating to the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. For example, when the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 063AK is not performed in the ending effect, the setting suggestion effect by the stop symbol in the feature unit 048AK may be executed. Further, for example, when the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 in the feature unit 063AK is executed in the ending effect, the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK may be further executed. In this case, it is different from FIG. 8-23. The setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK may be executed with reference to the table. That is, it is set to a high setting so as not to suggest that it is set to an unfavorable setting value even though it is suggested to be set to an advantageous setting value in the first aspect. The setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK may be executed with reference to the table in which the determination ratio is set for the mode suggesting that the condition is present. According to this, it is suggested that both the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 063AK and the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK are set to advantageous setting values, which gives the player a sense of expectation. It is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, the lamp effect may be executed as a setting suggestion effect instead of notifying the jackpot expectation degree.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied. A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the variable display of the target is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 085AKS005) and the above. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the suggestion effect executing means (for example, a lamp) that executes the suggestion effect of causing the predetermined light emitting means to emit light from the variable display executed before the variable display of the target to the variable display of the target. The predetermined light emitting means is provided with an effect control CPU 120 for executing the effect) and a light emitting mode determining means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the process of step 085AKS008) for determining the light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting means. The emission color to be emitted differs depending on the emission mode determined by the emission mode determining means (for example, the emission color is emitted in the emission color determined in step 085AKS008), and the suggestion effect executing means is suggested by the determination means. In the variable display of the target determined not to execute the effect, the predetermined light emitting means is turned off regardless of whether or not the predetermined light emitting means is emitting light in the variable display executed before the variable display of the target. In the variable display of the target determined by the determination means to execute the suggestion effect by performing the process (for example, executing the process of step 085AKS021), the predetermined in the variable display executed before the variable display of the target. Regardless of whether or not the light emitting means is emitting light, a process of causing the predetermined light emitting means to emit light (for example, executing the process of step 085AKS021) is further performed, and an advantageous suggestion suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state. An advantage suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an effect (for example, a hold display advance notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye advance notice effect, etc.) and a notice that the advantage suggestion effect is executed before the advantage suggestion effect is executed. It is provided with a preparatory effect executing means capable of executing a preparatory effect (for example, a hold display advance notice preparatory effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.), and the advantageous suggestion effect includes a first advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a hold display advance notice effect). A second advantageous suggestion effect different from the first advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a timer effect) and a third advantageous suggestion effect different from the first advantageous suggestion effect and the second advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a chance eye notice effect). ), The preparatory effect includes the first preparatory effect (for example, the hold display advance notice preparatory effect) for notifying that the first advantageous suggestion effect is executed, and the second advantageous suggestion effect being executed. The third advantageous suggestion effect, the first preparatory effect, and the second preparatory effect can be executed in parallel in the same period, including a second preparatory effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for notifying. (See FIGS. 12-11 (A1) and (A2)), which of the first preparatory effect and the second preparatory effect is higher than when either the first preparatory effect or the second preparatory effect is being executed. A game machine in which the third advantageous suggestion effect is more likely to be executed (see, for example, FIG. 12-10) is mentioned when

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble of turning on and off and suppress the deterioration of the game interest. In addition, it is possible to prevent a problem that the light emitting color does not emit light according to the effect and suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. In addition, the interest can be maintained favorably.

In addition, the third advantageous suggestion effect is produced when neither the first preparatory effect nor the second preparatory effect is executed than when either the first preparatory effect or the second preparatory effect is executed. In order to make it easier to execute and to maintain the interest more preferably, since the trouble of turning on and off the predetermined light emitting means is prevented in the variable display to be produced, the interest can be maintained more preferably.

Further, as an example of a form of a game machine capable of preventing a defect of lighting and extinguishing and suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game, and capable of maintaining the interest of the game, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, , A game machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state), and has an advantage that it can execute an advantage suggestion effect (for example, a hold display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) that suggests that it is controlled to an advantageous state. Suggestion effect execution means and preparatory effect execution means capable of executing a preparatory effect (for example, hold display advance notice preparatory effect, timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the advantageous suggestion effect is executed before the advantageous suggestion effect is executed. The advantageous suggestion effect includes a first advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a hold display notice effect), a second advantageous suggestion effect different from the first advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a timer effect), and the first advantageous effect. The preparatory effect includes a suggestion effect and a third advantageous suggestion effect different from the second advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a chance eye advance notice effect), and the preparatory effect is a first preparatory effect that announces that the first advantageous suggestion effect will be executed. (For example, a hold display advance notice preparatory effect) and a second preparatory effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second advantageous suggestion effect will be executed are included, and the third advantageous suggestion effect and the first preparatory effect are included. And the second preparatory effect can be executed in parallel in the same period (see FIGS. 12-11 (A1) and (A2)), and when either the first preparatory effect or the second preparatory effect is executed. A gaming machine is mentioned in which the third advantageous suggestion effect is more likely to be executed (see, for example, FIG. 12-10) when neither the first preparatory effect nor the second preparatory effect is executed. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these game machines will be described as another form example.

(Explanation of feature section 153SG)
Next, the game machine in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-34.

First, FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 153SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 153SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 153SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 153SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 153SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 153SG003a, and when the glass door frame 153SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the game machine frame 153SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and players other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 153SG003 and glass. The door frame 153SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 153SG002L is a game area in which a (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 153SG002R is a left game area 153SG002L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 153SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 153SG002L, and in the right game area 153SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 153SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning hole formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 153SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

Further, a first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 153SG005U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U, a reserved storage display for identifiablely displaying the reserved storage number (special figure reserved storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 153SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 153SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 153SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 153SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 153SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 153SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body portion provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is housed in the board case 153SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 153SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 153SG201.

Since the board case 153SG201 having the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 153SG003 in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is pressed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 153SG003. Further, since the lock switch 153SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 153SG051. Further, the lock switch 153SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

Further, in the board case 153SG201, a display monitor 153SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 153SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 153SG201. That is, the display monitor 153SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 153SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 153SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 153SG004B capable of variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st reserved storage number Instrument 153SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 153SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 153SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal symbol hold indicator 153SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 153SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 153SG002R. A game information display unit 153SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 153SG 132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 153SG 133 that lights up in a probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 153SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is off or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is variablely displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 153SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 153SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 153SG025A and the second hold indicator 153SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold indicator 153SG025A and second hold indicator 153SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In part 153SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when there is one 1st special figure hold memory and 2 2nd special figure hold memories (only the LED at the left end of the 1st hold indicator 153SG025A is lit and the 2nd hold is on. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 153SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 153SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 153SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 153SG321 and a second movable body 153SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 153SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 153SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 153SG321 and the second movable body 153SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 153SG322. The origin detection sensor 153SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 153SG332.

FIG. 11-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 153SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, etc.) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-5, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 11-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 11-6 shows the variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 11-6, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, since the big hit expectation is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-11, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), and FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table and the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

11-7 (A) and 11-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the jackpot game state when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the multiplying factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different (for example, setting). If the value is 1, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is set to be constant (for example, 5 times). May be good.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, paying attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 11-7 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of 6 set values of 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

11-8 (A) and 11-8 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 11-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 11-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-9. In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot types, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) for shifting to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , The jackpot type is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A) and 11-10 (B), as the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. In the fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), 1 to 400 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1). -1) is assigned, and 401 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). Assigned.

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), 1 to 200 of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997 are fluctuations in the normal reach jackpot. It is assigned to the pattern (PB1-1), and 201 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-). It is assigned to 3).

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, the variation pattern of small hits from 0 to 997 in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 ( It is assigned to PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the small hit is 2 or more. Fluctuation pattern may be provided.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), 1 to 450 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. Up to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are out of super reach α. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), 1 to 550 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-reach. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), 1 to 550 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are non-reach deviation variations. It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) out of normal reach, and 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α. 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is set higher than the ratio for determining the super reach variation pattern. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined at a common determination ratio, so that the variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is not executed. It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as the deviation pattern, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α outlier and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of the super reach β are between each set value. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratios of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and the fluctuation of either non-reach and normal reach may be the same. Only the pattern determination rate may be the same.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 11-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) to 11-11 (C), the variation is made by using the deviation pattern determination table that differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), the display monitor 153SG029 includes a first display unit 153SG029A, a second display unit 153SG029B, a third display unit 153SG029C, and a fourth display unit 153SG029D. The first display unit 153SG029A to the fifth display unit 153SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 153SG029A to the fifth display unit 153SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 153SG029 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in the entire areas of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 11-12 (B) and 11-12 (C), the display monitor 153SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 balls in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Of the base L. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth display unit 153SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth display unit 153SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth display unit 153SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth display unit 153SG029D.

In the display monitor 153SG029 of the present embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU103). For example, the main board 11 executes a control for switching the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in white, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in green, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". If it is "5", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in red, and if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the clerk of the game hall can specify the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 153SG029 without executing the setting value changing process described later by the CPU 103. ing.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 11-2 has an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, for effect control as shown in FIG. 11-13 (A). A data holding area 153SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 153SG190 shown in FIG. 11-13 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 153SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 153SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 153SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 153SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 153SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-13 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194. In the start winning command receive command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage is set. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. In addition, the start winning command buffer 153SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 153SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing that is executed when

Further, the start winning command buffer 153SG194A in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment has a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display in the lookahead advance notice setting process (FIG. 11-18) described later. The storage area of the hold display flag in which is set is secured for each storage area (entry).

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the hold display notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later. As a result, when the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, and the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided. Is "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (star)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display of a special mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. By setting "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (for example, a blue or red camera), it is usually set. The reserved storage display in a mode different from the display mode of is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U, and there is a possibility that the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage display will be a big hit. It is foretold that there is a high possibility of reaching and a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is likely to be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A. I will go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variation display that ended immediately before each time the variation display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display that starts are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 11-13 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variablely displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-14 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (153SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (153SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (153SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (153SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (153SGSa003; Y, 153SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (153SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 153SGsa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (153SGsa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. (153SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (153SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 153SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (153SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (153SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to 153SGSa011 (153SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa008; N), 153SGSa010 is not executed and 153SGSa011 is set. move on.

In 153SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011). When the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa012). When the release sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 153SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 153SG003 open (153SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not (153SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (153SGsa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 153SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (153SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (153SGsa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (153SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 153SG029. Next, every time the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, based on the fact that the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the set value displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. The command is output to the effect control CPU 120.

Further, in the set value confirmation process (153SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, the display of the set value on the display monitor 153SG029 may be terminated based on the fact that the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off.

When the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (153SGSa012; N) in 153SGSa011, the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d without executing the processes of 153SGSa013a to 153SGSa013c.

In 153SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (153SGSa009) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time ( 153SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 153SGsa014. When the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) Proceed to 153SGSa014 without executing.

In the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the set value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). .. That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGSa001 to 153SGSa013e and 153SGSa017 to 153SGSa021 described later, if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address in which the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except the dress you are wearing.

In 153SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (153SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 153SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (153SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 153SGSa028. (153SGSa016).

Further, in 153SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (153SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (153SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa019).

When the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened and the lock switch 153SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (153SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (153SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processes of 153SGSa009 to 153SGSa016 are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa017; N), the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 153SG090 is OFF (153SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (153SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (153SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029. (153SGSa024).

After executing 153SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (153SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (153SGsa026; N), the processes of 153SGsa025 and 153SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (153SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 153SG029. Ends blinking (153SGSa027) and proceeds to 153SGSa028.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, an example is exemplified in which all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 153SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (153SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (153SGSa029) and allow interrupts (153SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the 153SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (153SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (153SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (153SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (153SGSa034; N), the processes of 153SGsa033 and 153SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (153SGsa034; Y), the set value error error. 1st display unit 153SG029A, 2nd display unit 153SG029B, 3rd display unit 153SG029C, 4th display unit 153SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 153SG029, as notification (error notification) of recovery from power failure during occurrence or setting change. "E." is displayed in each of the above (153SGSa035).

Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B (153SGSa036), and plays a game via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa032 (153SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the process of 153SGsa032-153SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 153SG029. , The first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 153SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-14, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 153SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clearing process (153SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clearing process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 153SGSa021 but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 153SGSa014 (153SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

FIG. 11-15 is a flowchart showing a start winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is (153SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (153SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (153SGS101; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (153SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 153SGS102 (153SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1" (153SGS103). ).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 153SGS101 (153SGS101; N), or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in 153SGS102 (153SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (153SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (153SGS104; Y), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the second special figure is set to a predetermined upper limit value (153). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (153SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in 153SGS105 (153SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (153SGS106). ).

After executing any of the processes of 153SGS103 and 153SGS106, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (153SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (153SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is a stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of 153SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination is extracted (153SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (153SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while when the start port buffer value is "2". , Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 153SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the processing of the 153SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting port winning designation command according to the starting port buffer value is performed (153SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is used. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the processing of the 153SGS111, the winning random number value determination processing is executed (153SGS112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (153SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 153SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (153SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y at 153 SGS 114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (153 SGS 115), and then the process proceeds to 153 SGS 104. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 153 SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), and then the start winning process is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 11-16 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 153 SGS 112 of FIG. 11-15 as the winning random number value determination process. In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set by the special symbol normal process (S110 in FIG. 5). It is determined whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit", and whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning the 153SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result, whether or not it is determined that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Determines whether or not is in the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, the hold display notice effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, a game control flag setting unit (not shown), thereby pachinko. The current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is specified (153SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of 153SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 is selected and set (153SGS122). At this time, if the start port buffer value is 1, the CPU 103 sets the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), and if the start port buffer value is 2, FIG. 11-7. The display result determination table for the second special figure shown in (B) may be set.

After that, referring to the numerical range of the jackpot (judgment range of the jackpot) according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the set display result determination table, the special figure extracted by 153 SGS109 in FIG. 11-15. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range (153SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result determination table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as “big hit”.

If it is determined by the 153SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved during variable display (153SGS123; N), it is set to the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table. With reference to the numerical range of small hits (judgment range of small hits) according to the set value, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by 153SGS109 in FIG. 11-15 is It is determined whether or not it is within the small hit determination range (153SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153 SGS 122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each judgment value. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing with and one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the small hit judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the small hit judgment range. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the small hit determination range by comparing with. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as “small hit”.

When it is determined by the 153SGS124 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the small hit does not occur during the variable display (153SGS124; N), the variable display result becomes "missing". The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (153SGS125), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (153SGS126). If the time reduction flag is not set (153SGS126; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set (153SGS127), and if the time reduction flag is set (153SGS126; Y), the deviation pattern is changed. The determination table D is selected and set (153SGSS128).

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), the deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (D), the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed. is there.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation pattern determination table D, the deviation used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4. The variation pattern determination table B for deviation and the variation pattern determination table C for deviation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIGS. 11-11, these are out of alignment. Of the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to C for use, in the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for deviation, a value from 0 to 450 within the range that the random number value MR3 for judgment of the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern. In the deviation pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take.

Therefore, in the 153 SGS 132 described later, by determining the variation pattern (variation category) using the deviation pattern determination table A, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since it is a non-reach or super-reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined by using the deviation pattern determination table A in the determination at the time of starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), when the 153SGS123 determines that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot during variable display (153SGS123; Y), the jackpot type determination The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for (153SGS130). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot type determined in the 153SGS130 is executed (153SG131), and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern to any one of a plurality. Set (153SG132).

Further, when it is determined by the 153SGS124 that the small hit is within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the small hit is obtained during the variable display (153SGS124; Y), a symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit type is transmitted. Execute the setting (153SG129).

After executing any of the processes of 153 SGS 127, 153 SGS 128, 153 SGS 129, and 153 SGS 132, the numerical data showing the fluctuation pattern determination table set in the processes of 153 SGS 127, 153 SGS 128, 153 SGS 129, and 153 SGS 132 and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination. Is used to determine the variation category according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (153SGS133). In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the "non-reach" is common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable categories that are variable display modes, variable categories that are variable display modes of "super reach", and "others" that are variable display modes other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hits) It suffices if a variable category is provided and it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 153SGS132 to the effect control board 12 (153SGS134), the random number value determination processing at the time of winning is terminated.

FIG. 11-17 is a part of the flowchart of the effect control process process (S76) in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment. In the effect control process process in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, after the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) shown in FIG. 7 is executed, it is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U. Any one of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 after executing the hold display update process for updating the display mode and the number of displayed hold storage displays according to the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13 (B). It is designed to execute the processing of.

FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing a lookahead advance notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 11-17. In the lookahead advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13 (B) (153SGS241), and there is an entry in which the hold display flag is not set. Whether or not it is determined (153SGS242). If there is no entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the lookahead advance notice setting process is terminated. If there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the value of the hold display flag is already set to one of 1 to 4. It is determined whether or not there is an entry set (153SGS243).

If there is already an entry in which the value of the hold display flag is set to any of 1 to 4, that is, if the hold display notice effect has already been executed, the hold display flag is set in the entry (153SGS242). Set the hold display flag of (entry determined not to be present) to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect (that is, it is decided to display the hold storage display corresponding to the entry with "○"). The pre-reading notice setting process is terminated (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry in which the value of the hold display flag is already set to any of 1 to 4 is the case where the hold display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, if the hold display notice effect is already executed, the execution of the new hold display notice effect is restricted.

If there is no entry set in any of the values 1 to 4 of the hold display flag in 153SGS243, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (in 153SGS242, the hold display flag is not set). ) Is determined whether or not the symbol designation command indicates a big hit (153SGS244). When the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a jackpot, the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the hold display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to the hold display notice effect determination table (not shown), the presence / absence of execution of the hold display notice effect and the hold display The display pattern when the advance notice effect is executed is determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the hold display notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-19 (A), the presence / absence of the hold display advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 153SGS245.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (notice types) of the hold display notice effect are provided: display pattern α, display pattern β, display pattern γ, and display pattern δ. Of these, when the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U in a white star shape (☆). When the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the hold storage display is displayed on the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U by the blue camera, and the hold display is displayed. When the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U by the red camera. When it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold storage display is displayed in a white circle (◯) in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probability variable jackpot), non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 20%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%. Is decided, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is decided at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variation jackpot), non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is decided, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 55%, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%, and execution is decided at a rate of 10%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 153SGS244, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation category from the variation category specification command of the entry (153SGS248) when the symbol designation command of the entry is a miss or a small hit, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the hold display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the big hit type specified in 153SGS249, refer to the hold display notice effect determination table at the time of small hit / miss (not shown). By doing so, it is determined whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is non-reach, the non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided at a rate of 5%, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 0%. The execution of the hold display notice effect is determined, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of order or small hit and the variable category is other (when the normal reach is off or small hit), it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 75%, and 20%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided at the ratio, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at the ratio of 5%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at the ratio of 0%. The execution of the effect is determined, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is Super Reach, it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 55%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is decided, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 10%, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 5%, and execution is decided at a rate of 5%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-19 (A) and 11-19 (B), in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed, the hold display notice effect is not executed. When the jackpot game state is controlled at a higher rate than when the hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, the hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α. The jackpot type is set to be jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variation jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. Is a probabilistic jackpot, and the player's expectation of becoming a probabilistic jackpot can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation that the display pattern α and the display pattern β are controlled to the big hit game state (big hit expectation) Is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability variation big hit expectation) that the big hit type is big hit B or big hit C is the same.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. 11-19, the display pattern γ and The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is out of order and the variable category is super reach. That is, it is also suggested that the hold storage display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (a mode of the blue or red camera) is a variable display of super reach that can execute the setting suggestion effect described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B), when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the super reach. The hold memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 11-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the hold display advance notice effect is determined after the processing of the 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is executed (153SGS250). If it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold display flag of the entry is set to a value (any of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 and read ahead. The notice setting process is terminated (153SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer (not shown) are set. Various command data and various flags stored in association with each other (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed) in the first to fourth first special figure hold storage The corresponding command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). When the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), the figure is shown. No start The various command data and various flags (that is, variable display is being displayed) stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of winning. Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol (various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol hold storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (153SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing the 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (153SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of the aligned decorative symbols (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111", "11", " It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) in which three symbols are aligned with "7" is determined as a stop symbol. To do. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the chance eye indicating that it is a small hit as a stop symbol (third symbol is under a specific rule). It is determined from "334", "556", "778", etc.) that are not uniform. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (153SGS277). If the variable display variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. If the variable display variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern, the rear variable display suggestion effect is displayed during the variable display reach effect. Is executed (153SGS278), which determines whether or not to execute, and which effect is to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect. That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the rear variable display suggestion effect (big hit suggestion effect or setting suggestion effect) is a variable pattern of the super reach variation with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only on the display, and is not executed on the variable display of the normal reach and non-reach fluctuation patterns with a short special figure fluctuation time.

In the variable display of the super reach in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, the variable display result becomes a big hit as a suggestion effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or a timer effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit and a period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. , A setting that suggests a jackpot suggestion effect that suggests that the variable display result is a jackpot or a setting value that is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect that is the latter half of the variable display. Suggestive effects can be performed. That is, the process of 153SGS278 is a process of determining whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and whether to execute the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect during the reach effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect. ..

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect (either the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect) is determined in the process of the 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS278, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. The front variable display suggestion effect determination process for determining whether to execute the character effect or the timer effect as the variable display suggestion effect is executed (153SGS280). That is, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment does not determine the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect unless the execution of the rear variable display effect is determined, that is, the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed. In the variable display of reach and normal reach, the timer effect and the character effect are not executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display on the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (as shown in FIG. 11-28 (A)). Set the value according to (5 seconds after the start of the reach effect) and proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282). If it is decided to execute the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, wait for the suggestion effect start during the rear variable display. During variable display at the rear of the timer, the period until the start of the suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 11-28 (B), a value corresponding to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is the effect for 25 seconds). If the period is pattern TS-1, 5 seconds after the start of the reach effect, and if the timer effect pattern is the pattern TS-2, which is the effect period of 30 seconds, 10 seconds after the start of the reach effect). ) To proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the fluctuation pattern in the 153SGS285. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (153SGS287). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (153SGS288). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153 SGS290).

FIG. 11-21 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect determination process (153SGS278) during the rear variable display in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-20. In the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-21, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13 (B) and has a hold display flag corresponding to the variable display. Specify the value of (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the hold display flag of the entry of "1-0" of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable is displayed. When the display start command reception flag is set, the entry of "2-0" in the start winning command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and the effect to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect based on the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (A), when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the respondents decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 10% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 0% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display Determine the execution of the suggestion effect. Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the hold storage display is displayed as a white square or star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. If so, the non-execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 0%. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display at the rear Determines to execute the suggestion effect.

Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in the 153 SGS 301 is "3", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, 30 %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 35% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 35% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect. Then, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is 0. %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 30% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 70% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display, it is more than the case where the hold display notice effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Further, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"), It is higher than the case where the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "1" or "2"). It was set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display was determined by the ratio, and the hold memory display was displayed as a white square or star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case.

Also, pay attention to the case where the hold memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. The camera is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it is displayed, and the hold memory display is blue as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case where it is displayed in.

From the above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in a quadrangle or a star shape as a hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is used as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display. While it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, the hold memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. In that case, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of the setting suggestion effect being executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect is higher than the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the game is further played. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 11-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of the 153SGS 302 (153SGS303). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, further. , 153 SGS 302 determines whether or not the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (153SGS304).

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of the 153 SGS 302, the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is performed. Finish (153SGS305).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the processing of the 153 SGS 305, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (B), a total of three effect patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided. Among these effect patterns, the pattern AS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and the pattern AS-2 is It is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to a big hit. It is a production pattern (big hit expectation: high) that suggests that it is high.

Then, in the above-mentioned processing of the 153SGS305, as shown in FIGS. 11-23, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the big hit suggestion effect is changed to the pattern AS-1 at a rate of 10%. Is determined to be pattern AS-2 at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the processing of the 153SGS 302, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and sets a value (pachinko gaming machine 1) from the set value designation command received from the CPU 103. (Set value set in) is specified (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestion effect determination process during the rear variable display (153SGS307).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the 153SG 307, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (B), a total of five patterns from the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-5 are provided. Of these patterns SS-1 to pattern SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests that the set value may be an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 has an even number of set values (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility of 2, 4, 6), and the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the set value is equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5) closer to the odd number. Suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

The patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), and therefore, any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting). It is said that the degree of expectation is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5 and It is said that the expectation of being 6 is high.

In the feature unit 153SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low settings and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high settings, but the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low settings and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high settings. Then, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set with the setting values 1 and 2 being the low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 being the intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 being the high setting.

In the processing of the above-mentioned 153SGS307, as shown in FIG. 11-24, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern at a ratio of 60% to the pattern SS-. Determined to be 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, and 6 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 9% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 20 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 10% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 50%, and 10 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 20% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and 30 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 20% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 30% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 5% determines the pattern SS-5.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG, it is suggested that the set value is one of 1 to 4 by executing the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the set value suggestion is made. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in the pattern SS-3 or the pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, it is confirmed that the set value is 6.

FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing a front variable display suggestion effect determination process (153SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-20. In the front variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-25, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (153SGS312).

If it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, whether or not the front variable display suggestion effect is executed and the suggestion during the front variable display based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the variable display result. The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and a rate of 30%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of order, 70% of the time, 70% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 25% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 5%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

In other words, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. The execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and if the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the character effect and the execution of the timer effect are determined at the same ratio as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, while the variable display result. If is off, the execution of the character effect is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, that is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect. It is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect and executes the front variable display suggestion effect based on the variable display result. The presence / absence and the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the variable front display are determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and the rate is 0%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 70%. If the variable display result is out of alignment, 80% of the time, 80% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 0% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 20%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

That is, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and the execution of the character effect is not determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. That is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order as a result. When a timer effect is executed as an effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-25, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined after the execution of the 153 SGS 313 or the 153 SGS 314 (153 SGS 315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front part is further determined. It is determined whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the variable display (153SGS316).

If the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated. (153SGS317).

As a character effect effect pattern that can be determined in the process of 153 SGS317, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, are provided. .. Among these effect patterns, pattern CS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 is the lowest. Yes, the pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit by displaying the character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than that of the pattern CS-1. ).

Therefore, in the processing of the 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the character effect to the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20%. The pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80%, and to pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. Is determined and stored, and the suggestion effect determination process during the variable display of the unit is terminated (153SGS318).

As a timer effect effect pattern that can be determined in the processing of the 153 SGS 318, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Among these effect patterns, the pattern TS-1 suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5 is higher than that of the character effect patterns CS-1 and pattern CS-2 (big hit expectation: high). ) And the effect that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display for 25 seconds together with the image of the character X. The pattern TS-2 is the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5. Is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character effect (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is started for 25 seconds together with the image of the character Y. (See FIGS. 11-27 (C), 11-29 (D), and 11-29 (E)).

Therefore, in the processing of the 153SGS318, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (B), when the rear variable display suggestion effect whose execution is determined is the jackpot suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 produces a timer effect. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and to pattern TS-2 at a rate of 20%. Further, when the rear variable display suggestion effect whose execution is determined is the setting suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern TS- at a rate of 20%. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than in the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer). When the effect period of the effect is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A), the rate at which the set suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the player can pay attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5. Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is possible to expect the player to execute the setting suggestion effect as compared with the case where the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-26 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is performed. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. The production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-20 to 11-28, when the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect during the variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 is determined in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display effect process (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the rear variable display suggestion effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display process is executed. Then, based on the value of the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display to become 0, the process data corresponding to the determined effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set. Then, in the subsequent variable display effect processing (S172), the effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the process data according to the process timer.

As shown in FIGS. 11-28 (A) and 11-28 (B), the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the feature unit 153SG are during the execution period of the reach effect. It is executed for 7 seconds, which is a period longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 11-6). Therefore, even if the player takes his eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect.

Next, the effect mode during the variable display in the feature unit 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-29 to 11-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 (A) and 11-29 (B), a new start prize is generated during the variable display, and the hold memory display is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect based on the start prize. When the pattern is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, a new hold storage display is displayed in the mode of a blue or red camera in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U. ..

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 (C) to 11-29 (E), as a new variable display, when the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, which is the mode of the camera, is started, the front part The timer effect as a suggestion effect is started during the variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-1, the image 153SG005X of the character X is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5 and the rear part is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-29 (D). During the variable display, the timer update display for 25 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect, is started. When the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (E), the image 153SG005Y of the character Y is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5, and the rear part is variable. The update display of the timer for 30 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-30 (F) to 11-30 (H), when the variable display progresses together with the update display of the timer up to the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the super reach effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds during the execution of the super reach effect (the timer effect ends), the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect is started as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Specifically, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (I). A message indicating that the jackpot expectation is low, such as "chance!", Is displayed on the image display device 5, and if the determined production pattern is pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 11-30 (J). As described above, if a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as “hot!” Is higher than that of the pattern AS-1 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the determined effect pattern is the pattern AS-3, FIG. As shown in −30 (K), a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as “super hot!” Is higher than that of the pattern AS-2 is displayed on the image display device 5.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect is as shown in FIGS. 11-31 (L) to 11-31 (P). In the case of the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, the image display device 5 displays the setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters, so that the pachinko machine 1 is set. The setting value is suggested. Further, when the effect pattern of the set value suggestion effect is the pattern SS-5, the set value suggestion image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, is the image display device. It is displayed at 5.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice, the look-ahead notice is not executed or the hold memory display is displayed. The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or a star. For this reason, the player suggests the setting by a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, which is possessed in anticipation that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. You can now be ready to shoot the production. That is, the hold memory display of the aspect of the blue or red camera in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is also an effect of urging the player to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the character effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display suggesting the expectation of a big hit. As shown in −26 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. Will be executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the player pays more attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit because the jackpot expectation is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect is executed while the player is paying attention, and the player can prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked.

Further, as the front variable display suggestion effect during variable display, in addition to the character effect, a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the rear variable display suggestion effect can be executed, so that the setting suggestion effect can be performed. By executing the setting suggestion effect, the player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggestion effect.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a timer effect, the period until the execution start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is displayed as a numerical value (see FIGS. 11-29 (D) and 11-29 (E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, it is suggested that the rear variable display is performed by displaying an increase / decrease of a gauge, a meter, or the like. It is possible not to clearly notify the period until the start of execution of the effect (suggest only the approximate period).

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 (D) and 11-29 (E), an embodiment in which the timer effect is executed by the image display on the image display device 5 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the display means other than the image display device 5. Any one aspect of the display in (1) or a plurality of aspects may be combined and executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-30 (H) and 11-31 (L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect is 0. Based on this, a jackpot suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. That is, even when the timer effect is executed, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed instead of the setting suggestion effect, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 becomes 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect are performed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. An embodiment in which only one of them can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect becomes 0. , Both the setting suggestion performance and the jackpot suggestion production may be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the rear variable display suggestion effect is always executed when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a case where the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect but the rear variable display suggestion effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 (B) and 11-27 (C), as the effect pattern of the timer effect, the pattern TS-1 having an effect period of 25 seconds and the pattern having an effect period of 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. That is, it is suggested that when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed for a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, since the rear variable display suggestion effect including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period in the variable display of the super reach, the player sets suggestion effect. Can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period in the variable display of the super reach, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, there may be a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half period in the variable display of the super reach.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-18 and 11-22, the display mode of the hold storage display is changed to a white square or star shape, a blue or red camera as a look-ahead notice. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, it is possible to execute the hold display notice effect that can be displayed by the mode or the like. It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display (the value of the hold display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or a star. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, the player decides whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Since the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 and 11-31, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment corresponds to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect when the hold display notice effect is executed. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in the variable display (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished). For this reason, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display, which is the target of the hold display notice effect, so that the player can miss the setting suggestion effect. It can be further prevented.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the hold display notice effect can be executed as a look-ahead notice is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display notice is given as a look-ahead notice. It may be possible to execute an effect other than the effect, and suggest that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display which is the target of the hold display notice effect (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is more than the start of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect during the execution period of the hold display notice effect. It may be possible to execute the setting suggestion effect from the previous timing).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-19, the ratio of displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice effect is such that the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star as the look-ahead notice effect. Since it is set lower than the display ratio, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, so that the hold memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to draw attention to the person and further prevent the technician from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice effect is the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as the look-ahead notice effect in a white square or star shape. Although the embodiment set to be lower than the display ratio in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the hold memory display in a white square or star shape as a look-ahead notice effect, or the hold memory display may be set as a look-ahead notice effect of a blue or red camera. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as a white square or star as a pre-reading notice effect may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a hold display notice effect, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera to prepare the player for shooting the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smartphone before the start of the setting suggestion effect, the success rate of shooting the setting suggestion effect by the player can be increased.

In addition, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a hold display notice effect, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera to prepare the player for shooting the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the hold storage display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a hold display notice effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are used. The player may be separately urged to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect by the sound output of the above, the display of the message image on the image display device 5, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the hold display notice effect is provided by the display pattern γ that displays the hold memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ that displays the hold memory display in the form of a red camera. It is feasible, and as shown in FIG. 11-22 (A), when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera (when the value of the hold display flag is 3), the hold memory display is red. The rate at which the setting suggestion effect is executed is different from the case where the display is performed in the mode of the camera (when the value of the hold display flag is 4). In particular, when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the red camera, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera. When the display is displayed in the mode of the red camera, the player pays more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the hold memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display starts. Although the embodiment in which the mode does not change has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display mode of the hold memory display changes from the mode of the blue camera to the mode of the red camera. In addition, a case is provided in which the hold storage display corresponding to the variable display during execution is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display is changed from the mode of the blue camera to the mode of the red camera. You may. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention as to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed until the variable display is completed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-20, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is only in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach having a long special figure fluctuation time. Since it is feasible and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, it is suppressed that the setting suggestion effect is executed during the short variable display period, and the game It is possible to prevent the person from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-6 and 11-28, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is set to 7 seconds, which is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so that the super reach is variable. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during the display (during the execution of the reach effect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-19, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is a super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since it is suggested that the display is variable, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-19, when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the super reach, the hold display is displayed. Since the hold memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a notice effect, the player was paying attention to the fact that the hold memory display was displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being not executed and the interest from being lowered because the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is a variable display such as non-reach or normal reach.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-20 to 11-28, during the variable display of the super reach, the suggestion effect during the front variable display including the timer effect can be executed, but it is more special than the variable display of the super reach. Figure The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach with a short fluctuation time, so the timer effect is not executed during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect. The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach. It is possible to prevent inconsistency in the production due to the execution of.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is used. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 11-32 as a modified example 153SG-1, execution of a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. Is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the front variable display suggestion effect, and the front variable when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. It may be set to execute the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the display suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U of the image display device 5 in a white square, star shape, or blue color. Although a mode in which a hold display notice effect to be displayed in the mode of a red camera or a red camera can be executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 11-33 (A) and FIG. As shown in FIG. 11-33 (B), when the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, the image display device 5 displays the first hold storage display area 153SG005D. When the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps with the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, at least the hold storage display in the form of a blue or red camera is displayed with priority over the effect image 153SG005E (blue or red camera). (Display so that the hold storage display of the embodiment is not concealed by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the hold storage display of the blue or red camera mode due to the obstruction of the hold memory display of the blue or red camera mode by the effect image 153SG005E. be able to.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment illustrates a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 153SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (A) and 11-34 (B), the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds during the variable display of normal reach and non-reach without shortening. May be good. Further, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, the period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (C), is the special figure variation time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach. The setting suggestion effect may be executed for 3 seconds (3 seconds shorter than 3.75 seconds to 5.75 seconds).

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (A), the hold storage display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera and the mode of the red camera as the hold display notice effect. Although the embodiment in which the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different from that in the case of being displayed in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 153SG-4, the mode of the camera in which the hold memory display is blue. The determination ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on whether it is displayed in the mode of the red camera or in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can pay attention to whether the hold storage display is displayed in the form of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera as the hold display notice effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of the variable display) are provided as start timings of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of the super reach. Although the embodiment in which the setting suggestion effect is more easily executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect by executing the rear variable display suggestion effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 153SG- As a value 5, when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 25 seconds after the start of the variable display. It may be executed with an effect pattern suggesting a high set value such as SS-3 to pattern SS-5. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the hold memory display displayed as the hold display notice effect. Although a form suggesting whether or not to be performed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed as an effect executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display and a hold display notice effect. It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed only by one of the display mode of the hold storage display. Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display for executing the timer effect as the front variable display suggestion effect is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display for executing the timer effect is a big hit, the setting suggestion effect is set during the big hit game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. May be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is already executed, the mode of restricting the execution of the new hold display notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the hold display notice effect is already executed, the execution of only a part of the new hold display notice effects may be restricted. For example, if the hold display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new hold display notice effect is displayed. Only what is executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star) is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of hold display notice effects having different suggested contents. Further, when the hold display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ in this way, it is restricted that the new hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Therefore, the player can pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In addition, if the hold display notice effect has already been executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (when the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star), a new hold display notice effect is displayed. Whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (the hold memory display is displayed in the manner of a blue or red camera) The player can be even more noticed.

The feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the hold display advance notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is not limited thereto. As long as the effect can be executed from the timing before the variable display of the target starts, the effect other than the hold display notice effect may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as a suggestion effect during the front variable display suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, an effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the variable display result is a big hit.

(Explanation of feature part 092IW)
Next, the feature unit 092IW will be described. In this feature unit 092IW, a jackpot suggestion effect suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display becomes a jackpot and a preparatory effect for notifying that the jackpot suggestion effect is executed before the jackpot suggestion effect is executed are executed. It is possible. In addition, the jackpot suggestion effect whose execution is announced by the preparatory effect includes a look-ahead notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended) and the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. It may be either a notice effect for notifying the degree. In this feature unit 092IW, as a jackpot suggestion effect, a hold display notice effect, a timer effect, and a chance eye notice effect can be executed. In addition, as a preparatory effect for notifying that the jackpot suggestion effect will be executed before the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, a hold display for notifying that the hold display notice effect will be executed before the hold display notice effect is executed. It is possible to execute the advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect that announces that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed.

FIG. 12-1 is a part of the flowchart of the effect control process process (step S76) in the feature unit 092IW. In the effect control process process in the feature unit 092IW, the pre-reading advance notice effect is performed after the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161) in which the determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading advance notice effect shown in FIG. 7 is executed. The pre-reading advance notice execution process (step 092IWS162) for execution is executed, and then any of the processes of steps S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 is executed.

FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing a lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 12-1.

In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has been received (step 092IWS001). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not one set of the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold storage number notification command is newly stored in the start win winning command buffer. In this example, when a command at the time of starting winning is received in the command analysis process (step S75), the received command at the time of starting winning is stored in the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning provided in the RAM 122. In this example, since the upper limit of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is 4, the start winning command receive command buffer stores four each corresponding to the first reserved storage and the second reserved storage. Areas are provided. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received, the process ends as it is.

When a new command for starting a set of winning prizes is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed (step 092IWS001). If the look-ahead notice effect is being executed, the process is terminated as it is (that is, a new look-ahead notice effect is not executed).

When the pre-reading advance notice effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of reserved storages is 2 or more (step 092IWS002). If the number of reserved memories is not 2 or more, the process is terminated as it is (that is, a new look-ahead notice effect is not executed). Whether or not the number of reserved memories is 2 or more can be determined, for example, by checking the reserved stored number notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100.

When the number of hold storages is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold display advance notice effect and the effect mode when executing (step 092IWS003).

The hold display notice effect is an effect suggesting that the display result of the corresponding variable display becomes a big hit by changing the display mode of the hold storage display (and the active display) to a display mode different from the normal mode. In the feature unit 092IW, as a hold display notice effect, a pattern that changes the display mode at the time of being displayed as the hold storage display is shown, but the display is not limited to such a configuration and is displayed as the hold storage display. When it is displayed, it is displayed in a normal mode, and when it is displayed as an active display, it may include a pattern that changes the display mode. That is, a hold display notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold storage display or the active display at an arbitrary timing from the start winning time to the end of the target variable display may be configured to be executable. Similarly, the hold display notice preparation effect that announces that the hold display notice effect will be executed may be configured to be executable at any timing from the start winning time to the end of the target variable display. Further, the display mode of the hold storage display or the active display may be changed a plurality of times. In such a configuration, it may be possible to execute the hold display notice preparation effect corresponding to each hold display notice effect.

FIG. 12-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hold display advance notice effect determination table. In step 092IWS003, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, and with reference to the hold display notice effect determination table, the newly received commands at the time of starting winning (symbol designation command and variable category command) are "non-reach out", Based on which of "super reach out", "big hit other than big hit A", and "big hit A" is applicable, the hold display notice effect is "no execution hold memory display: normal mode (white)", "execution". Yes Hold memory display: 1st effect mode (blue) "," Execution hold memory display: 2nd effect mode (green) "and" Execution hold hold memory display: 3rd effect mode (red) " To do.

In the hold display notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), a determination value corresponding to a random number for effect determination is assigned to each winning determination result, but is assigned for the sake of simplification of explanation. The ratio of the judgment values is shown. That is, for each winning judgment result, regarding the hold display notice effect, "hold memory display without execution: normal mode (white)", "hold memory display with execution: first effect mode (blue)", "hold memory with execution" The ratio of which of "display: second effect mode (green)" and "execution held memory display: third effect mode (red)" is determined is shown. In this example, in addition to the hold display notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), the hold display notice preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-3 (B) and the hold display notice preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-4 (A) are shown. The timer effect determination table, the timer preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), and the chance eye advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) are all determined items in order to simplify the explanation. The percentage of whether it is decided is shown.

The features of the hold display notice effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), in the hold display notice effect determination table, when the winning judgment result is "big hit", the hold display notice effect is "not executed" as compared with the case of "missing". The judgment value is assigned so that the ratio of "execution" is higher than that of "". In addition, in the hold display notice effect determination table, when the winning judgment result is "big hit", it is "executed hold memory display: first effect mode (blue)" as compared with the case of "missing". It is decided to be "executed hold memory display: third effect mode (red)" rather than "execution hold memory display: second effect mode (green)" and "execution hold memory display: second effect mode (green)". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is high. With such a configuration, when the hold display advance notice effect is executed, the second effect mode (green) is more than the first effect mode (blue), and the third effect mode (red) is more than the second effect mode (green). It will be suggested that it will be a big hit when executed in. That is, the expectation that a big hit will be made increases in the order of the third effect mode (red)> the second effect mode (green)> the first effect mode (blue)> no execution.

If it is determined in step 092IWS003 that the hold display advance notice effect is not executed (N in step S092IWS004), the process proceeds to step S092IWS008, and if it is determined to be executed (Y in step S092IWS004), the effect control CPU 120 is held. A hold display notice effect flag indicating that it has been decided to execute the display notice effect is set (step S092IWS005).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the hold display advance notice preparation effect (step S092IWS006). The hold display notice preparation effect is one of the preparation effects, and is a notice that the hold display notice effect is executed before the hold display notice effect is executed.

FIG. 12-3 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hold display advance notice preparation effect determination table. In step 092IWS006, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, and with reference to the hold display advance notice preparation effect determination table, the hold display advance notice preparation effect is "not executed" or "executed" based on the effect mode of the hold display advance notice effect. It is determined to be one of "Yes 1st effect mode (small effect)" and "With execution 2nd effect mode (large effect)".

The features of the hold display notice preparation production decision table will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), in the hold display notice preparation effect determination table, the higher the expectation that the hold display notice effect is a big hit, the more “execution” of the hold display notice preparation effect. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio of "with execution" is higher than "without". Further, in the hold display notice preparation effect determination table, the higher the expectation that the hold display notice effect is a big hit, the more "executed first effect mode (small effect)" is used. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio determined to "2 production mode (large effect)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a big hit occurs when the hold display advance notice preparation effect is executed, and further when it is executed in the second effect mode (large effect) rather than the first effect mode (small effect). Will be. That is, the expectation that the big hit will be increased in the order of the second effect mode (large effect)> the first effect mode (small effect)> no execution.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of reserved storages is 3 or more (step 092IWS007). If the number of pending storage is not 3 or more, the process ends as it is. Whether or not the number of reserved memories is 3 or more can be determined, for example, by checking the reserved stored number notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100.

When the number of reserved storages is 3 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode when the timer effect is executed (step 092IWS008).

The timer effect suggests that the variable display result is a big hit from the start timing of the target variable display, and also suggests the period from the start of execution of the specific effect (for example, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the feature unit 153SG). It is a production.

In the feature unit 092IW, the timer effect is executed during the target variable display. Therefore, for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171) of the variable display determined to execute the timer effect, the timer effect is executed. It is realized by setting an effect control pattern and executing various effect controls based on the effect control pattern in the effect processing (S172) during variable display).

It should be noted that the configuration of the feature unit 092IW is not limited to, for example, whether or not to execute the timer preparation effect described later without determining whether or not to execute the timer effect at the time of starting winning, and the effect mode when executing. It may be determined, and when the target variable display is started, it may be determined whether or not to execute the timer effect. Further, in this case, it may be determined whether or not the timer effect is executed at different ratios and the effect mode when the timer effect is executed, depending on whether or not the timer preparation effect is executed and the effect mode.

Further, for example, the timer effect may be started during the variable display executed before the target variable display, or at the timing when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the target variable display. You may want to start. That is, the timer effect may be started at an arbitrary timing from the timing of the start winning to the end of the target variable display. Similarly, for the timer preparation effect that announces that the timer effect will be executed, any timing from the start winning timing to the end of the target variable display (however, until the timing when the timer effect execution period can be secured) You may start with.

FIG. 12-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table. In step 092IWS008, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, the timer effect determination table is referred to, and the newly received commands at the time of starting winning (design specification command and variable category command) are "non-super reach" and "super". Based on whether it corresponds to "out of reach" or "super reach jackpot", regarding the timer effect, "no execution", "first effect mode with execution (25 seconds)" and "second effect mode with execution (30)" Seconds) ”.

The features of the timer effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-4 (A), in the timer effect determination table, when the winning judgment result is "big hit", the timer effect is "not executed" rather than "not executed" as compared with the case of "missing". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio of "execution" is high. Further, in the timer effect determination table, when the winning judgment result is "big hit", "execution is performed second effect" rather than "execution is performed first effect mode (25 seconds)" as compared with the case of "missing". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio determined in "Aspect (30 seconds)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that when the timer effect is executed, and when the timer effect is executed in the second effect mode (30 seconds) rather than in the first effect mode (25 seconds), a big hit is obtained. Become. That is, the expectation that a big hit will be made increases in the order of the second effect mode (30 seconds)> the first effect mode (25 seconds)> no execution.

If it is determined in step 092IWS008 that the timer effect is not executed (N in step S092IWS009), the process proceeds to step S092IWS012, and if it is determined to be executed (Y in step S092IWS009), the effect control CPU 120 performs the timer effect. A timer effect flag indicating that it is determined to be executed is set (step S092IWS010).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the timer preparation effect (step S092IWS011). The timer preparatory effect is one of the preparatory effects, and foretells that the timer effect is executed before the timer effect is executed.

FIG. 12-4 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer preparation effect determination table. In step 092IWS006, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, the timer preparation effect determination table is referred to, and based on the effect mode of the timer effect, the timer preparation effect is described as "no execution" or "execution". It is determined to be either "small effect)" or "second effect mode with execution (large effect)".

The features of the timer preparation effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), in the timer preparation effect determination table, the higher the expectation that the timer effect effect mode is a big hit, the more “execution” of the timer preparation effect than “no execution”. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio of "Yes" is high. Further, in the timer preparation effect determination table, the higher the expectation that the timer effect is a big hit, the more the "execution second effect mode (character A)" is more than the "execution second effect mode (character A)". Judgment values are assigned so that the rate of determination of "character B)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that when the timer preparation effect is executed, and when the timer preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode (character B) rather than the first effect mode (character A), a big hit is obtained. become. That is, the degree of expectation that a big hit will be increased in the order of the second effect mode (character B)> the first effect mode (character A)> no execution.

The feature unit 092IW is configured so that the effectable mode of the jackpot suggestion effect differs depending on which effect mode the preparatory effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), when the hold display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the hold display is performed by any one of the first to third effect modes. When the notice effect is executed and the hold display notice preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed, the hold display notice effect is executed by any one of the second to third effect modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), when the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed by any one of the first to second effect modes, and the first effect mode is executed. When the timer effect of the two effect modes is executed, the timer effect is executed according to the second effect mode. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be different depending on the effect mode of the preparatory effect, and each effect mode of the preparatory effect (that is, each degree of expectation) is executed in combination with other preparatory effects and jackpot suggestion effects. The degree of expectation at the time can be preferably adjusted.

Further, in the feature unit 092IW, the jackpot suggestion effect is configured to be feasible without executing the corresponding preparatory effect. Specifically, when it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect or the timer effect, it may be determined that the hold display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is not executed (FIGS. 12-3 (B), FIG. 12-). 4 (B)). Then, the ease of execution is configured to differ depending on whether or not the uncorresponding preparatory effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-3, when the winning determination result is a big hit, it is easy to determine that the hold display notice effect and the hold display notice preparation effect are executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4, it is easy to determine when the timer effect is also executed. However, it may be decided not to execute the timer preparation effect. Then, when the hold display advance notice preparation effect that does not correspond to the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the hold display advance notice preparation effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

The feature unit 092IW is configured so that when the preparatory effect is executed, the corresponding jackpot suggestion effect is always executed. For example, as the preparatory effect, the corresponding jackpot suggestion effect is executed after the effect. The normal preparatory effect to be performed and the Gase preparatory effect in which the corresponding jackpot suggestion effect is not executed after the effect may be made feasible. In this case, when the Gase hold display notice preparation effect is executed, the timer effect (may be accompanied by the timer preparation effect or is accompanied by the timer preparation effect) as compared with the case where the Gase hold display notice preparation effect is not executed. It may be absent) to be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the hold display notice preparation effect is not good, and it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, the feature unit 092IW is configured so that the ratio of which effect mode the jackpot suggestion effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparatory effect is executed. Specifically, when the effect mode of the hold display notice effect or the timer preparation effect is determined to be the second effect mode, the hold display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is performed as compared with the case where the effect mode is determined to be the first effect mode. A high percentage of decisions are made to do so (see Figures 12-3 (B) and 12-4 (B)). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance eye advance notice effect (step 092IWS012).

The chance eye notice effect is a target by deriving and displaying a chance eye symbol (a combination of decorative symbols that is "123" in this example) as a display result of the variable display executed before the target variable display. This is an effect suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display (or any of the variable displays held and stored without specifying the target variable display) is a big hit.

FIG. 12-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance eye notice effect determination table. In step 092IWS012, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, the chance eye notice effect determination table is referred to, and the newly received command at the time of starting prize (design specification command and variable category command) is "non-super reach". Based on whether it corresponds to "out of super reach", "big hit other than big hit A", or "big hit A", the chance eye notice effect is decided as either "no execution" or "execution".

The features of the chance eye notice production decision table will be explained. As shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), in the chance eye notice effect determination table, when the winning judgment result is "big hit", the chance eye notice effect is "not executed" as compared with the case of "missing". The judgment value is assigned so that the ratio of "execution" is higher than that of "". With such a configuration, it is suggested that a big hit will be obtained when the chance eye notice effect is executed.

The feature unit 092IW is configured to be able to execute a hold display notice effect, a timer effect, and a chance eye notice effect as jackpot suggestion effects, which are shown in FIGS. 12-3 (A), 12-4 (A), and FIGS. As shown in 12-5 (A), the chance eye advance notice effect is executed when the winning judgment result is executed at a lower rate than the hold display advance notice effect and the timer effect, and is out of order. Since the ratio is high, the difference in the execution ratio is small between when the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit and when it is not. Therefore, the chance eye notice effect is less expected to be a big hit than the hold display notice effect and the timer effect.

If it is decided not to execute the chance eye notice effect in step 092IWS012 (N in step S092IWS013), the process proceeds to step S092IWS015, and if it is decided to execute (Y in step S092IWS013), the effect control CPU 120 has a chance. The chance eye notice effect flag indicating that it is decided to execute the eye notice effect is set (step S092IWS014).

Next, when the hold display notice effect flag is set (Y in step S092IWS015), the effect control CPU 120 displays a new hold storage display according to the determination of the hold display advance notice preparation effect (step S092IWS016). ..

In step S092IWS016, for example, when it is determined to execute the hold display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a new hold memory display in the normal mode and displays the hold memory display. A small effect image (see, for example, the small effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 12-11 (B1)) is displayed in the vicinity of. Further, when it is determined to execute the hold display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a new hold storage display in the normal mode and has an effect in the vicinity of the hold storage display. A large image (see, for example, image 092IW004b with a large effect in FIG. 12-11 (A1)) is displayed.

Next, when the timer effect flag is not set (N in step S092IWS017), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is, and when the timer effect flag is set (Y in step S092IWS017), It is confirmed whether or not the hold display notice preparation effect is the first effect mode (step S092IWS018). Then, when the hold display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode (Y in step S092IWS018), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer preparation effect (step S092IWS019). After that, the process ends.

In step S092IWS019 (and step S092IWS022 described later), for example, when it is determined to execute the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode, the character A foretelling that the timer effect will be executed in the image display device 5. An image (see, for example, image 092IW005 of character A in FIG. 12-10 (E)) is displayed. Further, when it is determined to execute the timer preparation effect of the second effect mode, the image display device 5 displays the character B image foretelling that the timer effect is executed.

If the hold display notice effect flag is not set in step S092IWS015 (N in step S092IWS015), the effect control CPU 120 displays a new hold storage display according to the normal mode (step S092IWS020).

Next, when the timer effect flag is not set (N in step S092IWS021), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is, and when the timer effect flag is set (Y in step S092IWS021), The timer preparation effect is executed (step S092IWS022). After that, the process ends.

FIG. 12-6 is a flowchart showing a lookahead advance notice execution process (step 092IWS161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 12-1.

In the lookahead advance notice execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the hold display advance notice effect flag is set when it is the shift timing of the hold storage (Y in step 092IWS101) (step 092IWS102). ..

When the hold display notice effect flag is set (Y in step 092IWS102), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the hold display notice preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS103).

When the hold display notice preparation effect is being executed (Y in step 092IWS103), the effect control CPU 120 ends the hold display notice preparation effect and executes the hold display notice preparation effect (step 092IWS104).

Next, when the timer effect flag is set (Y in step 092IWS105), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the timer preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS106).

When the timer preparation effect is not being executed (N in step 092IWS103), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer preparation effect (step 092IWS107).

Next, the execution timings of the hold display notice effect and the hold display notice preparation effect, and the timer effect and the timer preparation effect will be described. FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution timing of the hold display advance notice effect (preparation effect) and the timer effect (preparation effect).

FIG. 12-7 (A) shows an example in the case where the execution of the hold display notice effect and the hold display notice preparation effect is decided at the time of starting winning. In this case, the hold display notice preparation effect is started at the start winning timing (for example, corresponding to the process of the look-ahead notice setting process of step 092IWS015-092IWS016 shown in FIG. 12-2), and is held at the shift timing of the hold memory. The display advance notice preparation effect is completed and the hold display advance notice effect is executed (for example, it corresponds to the process of steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the look-ahead advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 12-6).

FIG. 12-7 (B) shows an example in which the execution of the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect is determined at the time of starting winning. In this case, the timer preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning prize (for example, it corresponds to the process of steps 092IWS0221 to 092IWS022 of the read-ahead notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-2), and at the start timing of the target variable display. The timer preparation effect ends and the timer effect starts (for example, an effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set in the variable display start setting process (S171), and output control is performed in the variable display in-process effect process (S172). It is realized by executing various effect controls based on the pattern).

FIG. 12-7 (C) shows an example in which the execution of the hold display notice effect and the hold display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect are decided at the time of starting winning. .. In this case, the hold display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning prize (for example, it corresponds to the process of step 092IWS015-092IWS016 of the lookahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-2). , The timer preparation effect is started (for example, it corresponds to the process of steps 092IWS018 to 092IWS019 of the lookahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-2). Then, the hold display notice preparation effect ends at the shift timing of the hold memory, and the hold display notice effect is executed (for example, it corresponds to the process of steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the lookahead notice execution process shown in FIG. 12-6). After that, the timer preparation effect ends and the timer effect starts at the start timing of the target variable display (for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171), an effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set. It is realized by executing various effect controls based on the output control pattern in the variable display during effect process (S172)).

FIG. 12-7 (D) shows an example in which the execution of the hold display notice effect and the hold display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect are decided at the time of starting winning. .. In this case, the hold display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning prize (for example, it corresponds to the process of step 092IWS015-092IWS016 of the lookahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-2). , The timer preparation effect is not started (for example, it corresponds to the process of step 092IWS018 of the lookahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-2). Then, when the hold display notice preparation effect ends and the hold display notice effect is executed at the shift timing of the hold memory (for example, it corresponds to the process of steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the lookahead notice execution process shown in FIG. 12-6). , The timer preparation effect is started (for example, corresponding to the process of step 092IWS105-092IWS107 of the lookahead advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 12-6). After that, the timer preparation effect ends and the timer effect starts at the start timing of the target variable display (for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171), an effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set. It is realized by executing various effect controls based on the output control pattern in the variable display during effect process (S172)).

Next, an effect mode of the hold display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect will be described. FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the hold display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect.

FIG. 12-8 shows an example in which the execution of the hold display notice effect and the hold display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect are determined at the time of winning the start. Corresponds to the example of -7 (D).

As shown in FIGS. 12-8 (A) and 12-8 (B), a new start prize is generated during the variable display, and the hold display notice effect and the hold display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) are based on the start prize. When the execution of the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is determined, a new hold memory display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 092IW001 and the second hold storage display area 092IW002 in the normal mode. To. At this time, the hold display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is started, and a lightning-type effect-sized image 092IW004a is displayed in the vicinity of the new hold storage display. Since the timer advance notice preparation effect is restricted to be executed at the same time as the hold display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode), it is not executed at this timing.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 12-8 (C) to 12-8 (D), when the variable display ends, the hold storage is shifted, and a new variable display is started, the hold display notice preparation The effect (second effect mode) is progressively completed (for example, display control is performed in which the lightning bolt type effect-sized image 092IW004a acts on the hold memory display and disappears), and the display mode of the hold memory display changes to red. Hold display notice effect (third effect mode) is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (E), the timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is started, and the image 092IW005 of the character A foretelling that the timer effect is executed is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 12-8 (F) to 12-8 (G), when a new variable display that is the target of the timer effect is started, the timer preparation effect (first effect mode) develops. The timer effect (first effect mode) is started, in which the timer is updated and displayed for 25 seconds, which is the period until the specific effect during the variable display.

The feature unit 092IW is configured to be able to execute a hold display notice effect and a timer effect as a jackpot suggestion effect suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display is a jackpot. In addition, a hold display notice preparation effect for notifying that the hold display notice effect will be executed before the hold display notice effect is executed, and a timer for notifying that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed. It is configured to be feasible as a preparatory effect.

Such a preparatory effect has a function of paying attention to a jackpot suggestion effect executed after the preparatory effect, but if a plurality of preparatory effects are executed at the same time, the player's expectation becomes too high, and as a result, a big hit is achieved. If it doesn't, there is a risk that it will greatly reduce the interest. Therefore, in this feature unit 092IW, it is restricted that a plurality of preparatory effects are executed at the same time. Specifically, the hold display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are configured so that they are not executed at the same time because the execution period is different (in this example, the hold display notice preparation effect (in this example). After the execution of the second effect mode) is completed, the timer preparation effect is executed. See FIG. 12-7 (D). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

In the configuration of the feature unit 092IW, the hold display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are configured so that the execution periods do not overlap at all, but for example, at least the start timing. The execution period may be different by making one of the end timings different.

Further, in the configuration of the feature unit 092IW, the hold display notice preparation effect (first effect mode), which has a lower expectation than the hold display notice preparation effect (second effect mode), can be executed at the same time as the timer preparation effect. However, the timer is prepared at a predetermined ratio not only in such a configuration but also in the hold display notice preparation effect (first effect mode), even if it is not as high as the hold display notice preparation effect (second effect mode). It may not be executed at the same time as the production. In addition, a plurality of preparatory effects may not always be executed at the same time.

Further, for example, the first effect mode in which the effect mode of the hold display advance notice preparation effect is lower than the second effect mode, and the effect mode of the timer preparation effect is lower than the second effect mode. It may be executed at the same time only when it is an effect mode.

Further, for example, when a plurality of preparatory effects are executed at the same time (or when a plurality of preparatory effects are simultaneously executed in a second effect mode having a high degree of expectation), the jackpot may be confirmed. ..

Further, in the configuration of the feature unit 092IW, a pattern in which the display mode of the hold storage display (and the active display) changes once is shown, but a pattern in which the display mode of the hold memory display (and active display) changes a plurality of times is provided. If so, when the hold storage display (or active display) is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode (specifically, a display mode in which a display mode with a higher degree of expectation exists), the hold memory display is displayed. If an arrow flies toward an effect (for example, hold memory display (or active display)) that suggests that the display mode of the display (or active display) changes, and the hold memory display (or active display) is stabbed, it changes. , An effect that does not change unless it is stabbed (may be a dedicated effect that is executed only when the hold memory display (or active display) is a display mode other than the normal mode), etc.) may be executed more frequently. , On the contrary, it may not be executed.

Next, the process for executing the chance eye notice effect will be described. FIG. 12-9 is a flowchart showing an example of the chance eye notice setting process. The chance eye notice setting process is executed as a part of the variable display start setting process (step S171) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 12-1.

In the chance eye notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the chance eye notice effect flag is set (step 092IWS201). When the chance eye notice effect flag is set, it is determined whether or not the chance eye notice effect can be executed by using the chance eye notice execution possibility determination table (step 092IWS202).

FIG. 12-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the chance eye advance notice. As shown in FIG. 12-10, when neither the hold display advance notice preparation effect nor the timer preparation effect is executed, the execution of the "executable" (that is, the chance eye advance notice effect) is performed at a rate of 100%. Allow) is determined. In addition, when either the hold display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is being executed in the second effect mode, it is "executable" at a rate of 20% (that is, the execution of the chance eye notice effect is permitted. It is decided that "execution is not possible" (that is, execution of the chance eye notice effect is not permitted) at a rate of 80%. Further, when either the hold display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is executed in the first effect mode (and neither is executed in the second effect mode), the ratio is 100%. Is determined as "execution failure" (that is, execution of the chance eye notice effect is not permitted).

When the execution of the chance eye notice effect is permitted in step 092IWS202 (Y in step 092IWS203), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined to be the chance eye symbol (combination of decorative symbols which is "123" in this example) (step). 092IWS204). If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol has already been determined before step 092IWS204, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is changed to the chance symbol.

Next, the production modes of the hold display advance notice preparation effect and the chance eye advance notice effect will be described. FIG. 12-11 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the hold display advance notice preparation effect and the chance eye advance notice effect.

As shown in FIGS. 12-11 (A1) and 12-11 (A1) and (A2), the hold display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is executed, and a lightning bolt type effect-sized image 092IW004a is displayed in the vicinity of the hold memory display. Occasionally, the execution of the chance eye notice effect may be permitted, and if the execution is permitted, the chance eye symbol (combination of decorative symbols that is "123" in this example) is used as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Is displayed. That is, the hold display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the chance eye advance notice effect are executed at the same time.

As shown in FIGS. 12-11 (B1) and 12-11 (B1) and (B2), the hold display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is executed, and a lightning bolt type effect small and large image 092IW004b is displayed in the vicinity of the hold memory display. When is present, since the execution of the chance eye notice effect is not permitted, a stop symbol of the decorative symbol different from the chance eye symbol (combination of decorative symbols of "123" in this example) is displayed. That is, the hold display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) and the chance eye notice effect are not executed at the same time.

In this feature unit 092IW, as a jackpot suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a chance eye notice effect separately from the hold display notice effect and the timer effect, and this chance eye notice effect is a preparatory effect such as a hold display advance notice preparation effect and a timer preparation effect. It is configured to be executed in parallel in the same period as (that is, it is executed in the period before the execution of the target variable display. See FIGS. 12-11 (A1) and (A2)). Further, as described above, the chance eye notice effect is less expected to be a big hit than the hold display notice effect and the timer effect. Therefore, when the preparatory effect is being executed (that is, before the jackpot suggestion effect is executed and the degree of expectation is unknown), the chance eye notice effect with a low expectation of being a big hit is executed. In addition, there is a risk that the effect of the preparatory effect will be reduced. In addition, the suggested degree of expectation may be difficult to understand. Therefore, the feature unit 092IW is configured so that the chance eye advance notice effect is more easily executed when the hold display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect are not executed than when they are executed (). For example, see FIG. 12-10). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, in the feature unit 092IW, a chance eye notice is given when the preparatory effect of the first effect mode is executed and when the preparatory effect of the second effect mode, which has a higher expectation than the first effect mode, is executed. It is configured so that the ease of execution of the production is different. Specifically, the chance eye advance notice effect is performed when the hold display advance notice preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode (large effect) than when it is executed in the first effect mode (small effect). It is configured to be easily allowed to run (see Figure 12-10). With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably maintain the interest while securing the opportunity to execute the chance eye notice effect.

As described above, in the feature unit 092IW, an advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a hold display advance notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye advance notice effect, etc.) suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). It is possible to execute a means for executing the advantageous suggestion effect and a preparatory effect for notifying that the advantageous suggestion effect is executed before the advantageous suggestion effect is executed (for example, a hold display advance notice preparatory effect or a timer preparation effect). The advantageous suggestion effect includes a first advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a hold display notice effect) and a second advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first advantageous suggestion effect. The preparatory effect includes the first preparatory effect (for example, the hold display advance notice preparatory effect) for notifying that the first advantageous suggestion effect is executed, and the second foretelling that the second advantageous suggestion effect is executed. The first advantageous suggestion effect and the second advantageous suggestion effect can be executed at the same time, including the preparatory effect (for example, timer preparation effect), and the first preparatory effect and the second preparatory effect are executed at the same time. (For example, the hold display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are not executed at the same time. See FIG. 12-7 (D)). Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, in the present feature unit 092IW, it is possible to execute an advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a hold display advance notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye advance notice effect, etc.) that suggests that the control is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). Suggestion effect execution means and preparatory effect execution means capable of executing a preparatory effect (for example, hold display advance notice preparatory effect, timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the advantageous suggestion effect is executed before the advantageous suggestion effect is executed. The advantageous suggestion effect includes a first advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a hold display notice effect), a second advantageous suggestion effect different from the first advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a timer effect), and the first advantageous effect. The preparatory production includes a suggestion effect and a third advantageous suggestion effect different from the second advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a chance eye advance notice effect), and the preparatory effect is a first preparatory effect that announces that the first advantageous suggestion effect will be executed. (For example, a hold display advance notice preparatory effect) and a second preparatory effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second advantageous suggestion effect will be executed are included, and the third advantageous suggestion effect and the first preparatory effect are included. And the second preparatory effect can be executed in parallel in the same period (see FIGS. 12-11 (A1) and (A2)), and when either the first preparatory effect or the second preparatory effect is executed. It is easier to execute the third advantageous suggestion effect when neither the first preparatory effect nor the second preparatory effect is executed (see, for example, FIG. 12-10). Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, in the present feature unit 092IW, it is possible to execute an advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a hold display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) that suggests that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). Suggestion effect execution means and preparatory effect execution means capable of executing a preparatory effect (for example, hold display advance notice preparatory effect, timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the advantageous suggestion effect is executed before the advantageous suggestion effect is executed. The advantageous suggestion effect includes a plurality of types of first advantageous suggestion effects having different expectations (for example, a hold display notice effect having different expectations depending on the effect mode) and a second advantage different from the first advantageous suggestion effect. The first advantageous suggestive effect includes a suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect), and the first advantageous suggestive effect includes a predetermined first advantageous suggestive effect and a special first advantageous suggestive effect having a higher expectation than the predetermined first advantageous suggestive effect (for example). For example, the hold display notice effect of the first effect mode (blue) and the hold display notice effect of the third effect mode (red)) and the preparatory effect foretell that the first advantageous suggestion effect will be executed. The first preparatory effect includes a first preparatory effect (for example, a hold display advance notice preparatory effect) and a second preparatory effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second advantageous suggestion effect is executed. As the effect mode, there are a first effect mode and a second effect mode in which a special first advantageous suggestion effect is more easily executed than the first effect mode (for example, a first effect mode (small effect) and a second effect mode). (Large effect) When the hold display notice preparation effect of the second effect mode (large effect) is executed, the hold display notice effect of the first effect mode (blue) is not executed, and the third effect mode (third effect mode) (Red) is easy to execute the hold display notice effect. (See FIG. 12-3 (B)), when the first preparatory effect of the first effect mode is executed, and when the first preparatory effect of the second effect mode is executed. The execution ratio of the second preparatory effect differs depending on the time (for example, the timer preparatory effect is executed at the same time when the hold display advance notice preparatory effect of the first effect mode (small effect) is executed, but the second 2 Hold display notice of the effect mode (large effect) When the preparatory effect is being executed, it is not executed at the same time. See FIG. 12-7). Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, in the present feature unit 092IW, it is possible to execute an advantageous suggestion effect (for example, a hold display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) that suggests that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). Suggestion effect execution means and preparatory effect execution means capable of executing a preparatory effect for notifying that the advantageous suggestion effect is executed before the advantageous suggestion effect is executed (for example, hold display advance notice preparatory effect, timer preparation effect, etc.) The advantageous suggestion effect includes a plurality of types of first advantageous suggestion effects having different expectations (for example, a hold display notice effect having different expectations depending on the effect mode) and a second advantage different from the first advantageous suggestion effect. The first advantageous suggestion effect includes a suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect) and a third advantageous suggestive effect (for example, a chance eye notice effect) different from the first advantageous suggestive effect and the second advantageous suggestive effect. Includes a predetermined first advantageous suggestion effect and a special first advantageous suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the predetermined first advantageous suggestive effect (for example, a hold display notice effect of the first effect mode (blue) and a third effect). The mode (including the hold display notice effect) and the preparatory effect are the first preparatory effect (for example, the hold display advance notice preparatory effect) for notifying that the first advantageous suggestion effect is executed, and the second advantageous suggestion effect. The third advantageous suggestion effect, the first preparatory effect, and the second preparatory effect can be executed in parallel in the same period, including the second preparatory effect (for example, timer preparation effect) that announces that the effect will be executed. (See FIGS. 12-11 (A1) and (A2)), in the first preparatory effect, the first effect mode and the special first advantageous suggestion effect are more likely to be executed than the first effect mode. There is a second effect mode (for example, when there is a first effect mode (small effect) and a second effect mode (large effect), and the hold display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode (large effect) is executed. , The hold display notice effect of the first effect mode (blue) is not executed, and the hold display notice effect of the third effect mode (red) is likely to be executed. See FIG. 12-3 (B)), The execution ratio of the third advantageous suggestion effect differs between when the first preparatory effect is executed and when the first preparatory effect of the second effect mode is executed (for example, the chance eye advance notice effect is a hold display advance notice). When the preparatory effect is executed in the second effect mode (large effect), the execution is more likely to be permitted than when the preparatory effect is executed in the first effect mode (small effect). See FIG. 12-10). Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, in the feature unit 092IW, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed for different periods of time (for example, after the execution of the hold display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is completed, the timer preparation effect is completed. Is executed. See FIG. 12-7 (D)). Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, in the feature unit 092IW, the first advantageous suggestion effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, a first effect mode (blue), a second effect mode (green), a third effect mode (red), and the like. -3 (Refer to (A)), the first preparatory effect is performed by a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, first effect mode (small effect), second effect mode (large effect), and the like. It is executed by any one of 12-3 (B)), and the effectable mode of the first advantageous suggestion effect differs depending on which effect mode the first preparatory effect is executed (for example). , When the hold display notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the hold display notice effect is executed by any one of the first to third effect modes, and the hold display notice preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed. When is executed, the hold display notice effect is executed by any one of the second to third effect modes). Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, in the feature unit 092IW, the advantageous suggestion effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparatory effect (for example, when it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect or the timer effect, the hold display notice preparation effect is executed. And timer preparation effects may be determined not to be executed. (See FIGS. 12-3 (B) and 12-4 (B)), and ease of execution depending on whether or not an uncorresponding preparation effect has been executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3, when the winning determination result is a big hit, it is easy to determine that the hold display notice effect and the hold display notice preparation effect are executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4. As described above, it is easy to determine when the timer effect is also executed. However, it may be determined not to execute the timer preparation effect. Then, the hold display notice preparation effect which does not correspond to the timer effect is held. The timer effect is easier to execute than when the display notice preparation effect is not executed). Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, in the feature unit 092IW, the ratio of which effect suggestion effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed (for example, the effect of the hold display notice effect or the timer preparation effect). When the mode is determined to be the second effect mode, the ratio of determining to execute the hold display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is higher than that in the case where the first effect mode is determined. FIG. 12-3 (B). , See Figure 12-4 (B)). Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 092IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by other feature units such as the feature unit 153SG to configure the game machine. For example, it is suggested that the timer preparation effect shown by the feature unit 092IW is a big hit shown by the feature unit 153SG, and that the timer effect suggesting the period until the execution start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is executed. Foretelling, the timer effect can execute a jackpot suggestion effect that suggests a big hit as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display or a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the reach effect. It may be set to.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 5 ... Image display device 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control CPU

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the variable display of the object is controlled to the advantageous state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition.
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the suggestion effect execution means for executing the suggestion effect of causing the predetermined light emitting means to emit light from the variable display executed before the variable display of the target to the variable display of the target.
A light emitting mode determining means for determining a light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting means is provided.
The predetermined light emitting means has a different emission color depending on the light emitting mode determined by the light emitting mode determining means.
The suggestion effect execution means
In the variable display of an object for which the determination means has determined not to execute the suggestion effect, regardless of whether or not the predetermined light emitting means emits light in the variable display executed before the variable display of the object. Performs a process to turn off the predetermined light emitting means,
In the variable display of the target determined by the determination means to execute the suggestion effect, the predetermined light emitting means is emitting light in the variable display executed before the variable display of the target, regardless of whether or not the predetermined light emitting means emits light. Performs a process to make the light emitting means emit light,
further,
An advantageous suggestion effect executing means capable of executing an advantageous suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, and
It is provided with a preparatory effect executing means capable of executing a preparatory effect foretelling that the advantageous suggestive effect is executed before the advantageous suggestive effect is executed.
The advantageous suggestion effect includes a first advantageous suggestive effect, a second advantageous suggestive effect different from the first advantageous suggestive effect, and a third advantageous suggestive effect different from the first advantageous suggestive effect and the second advantageous suggestive effect. Including and
The preparatory effect includes a first preparatory effect that announces that the first advantageous suggestion effect will be executed, and a second preparatory effect that announces that the second advantageous suggestion effect will be executed.
The third advantageous suggestion effect, the first preparatory effect, and the second preparatory effect can be executed in parallel in the same period.
It is more advantageous when neither the first preparatory effect nor the second preparatory effect is executed than when either the first preparatory effect or the second preparatory effect is executed. A game machine characterized by the fact that suggestive effects are easily executed.